2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM MT42L128M16D1, MT42L64M32D1, MT42L64M64D2, MT42L128M32D2, MT42L256M32D4, MT42L128M64D4 MT42L96M64D3, MT42L192M32D3 Features Options * VDD2: 1.2V * Configuration - 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 1 die - 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 1 die - 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 2 die - 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 4 die - 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 2 die - 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 3 die - 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 4 die - 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 2 die + 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks x 1 die * Device type - LPDDR2-S4, 1 die in package - LPDDR2-S4, 2 die in package - LPDDR2-S4, 3 die in package - LPDDR2-S4, 4 die in package * FBGA"green" package - 134-ball FBGA (11mm x 11.5mm) - 134-ball FBGA (11.5mm x 11.5mm) - 168-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 168-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 168-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 216-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 216-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 216-ball FBGA (12mm x 12mm) - 220-ball FBGA (14mm x 14mm) - 220-ball FBGA (14mm x 14mm) * Timing - cycle time - 1.875ns @ RL = 8 - 2.5ns @ RL = 6 - 3.0ns @ RL = 5 * Operating temperature range - From -25C to +85C - From -40C to +105C * Revision * Ultra low-voltage core and I/O power supplies - VDD2 = 1.14-1.30V - VDDCA/VDDQ = 1.14-1.30V - VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V * Clock frequency range - 533-10 MHz (data rate range: 1066-20 Mb/s/pin) * Four-bit prefetch DDR architecture * Eight internal banks for concurrent operation * Multiplexed, double data rate, command/address inputs; commands entered on every CK edge * Bidirectional/differential data strobe per byte of data (DQS/DQS#) * Programmable READ and WRITE latencies (RL/WL) * Programmable burst lengths: 4, 8, or 16 * Per-bank refresh for concurrent operation * On-chip temperature sensor to control self refresh rate * Partial-array self refresh (PASR) * Deep power-down mode (DPD) * Selectable output drive strength (DS) * Clock stop capability * RoHS-compliant, "green" packaging Table 1: Key Timing Parameters Speed Grade Clock Rate (MHz) -182 533 1066 8 4 Typical -25 400 800 6 3 Typical -3 333 667 5 2 Typical Data Rate (Mb/s/pin) RL WL tRCD/tRP1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1 Marking L 128M16 64M32 128M32 256M32 64M64 96M64 128M64 192M32 D1 D2 D3 D4 MH MG KL LE KP KH KJ KU MP LD -182 -25 -3 IT AT :A 1. For fast tRCD/tRP, contact factory. 2. For -18 speed grade, contact factory. Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Products and specifications discussed herein are subject to change by Micron without notice. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Table 2: Single Channel S4 Configuration Addressing 128 Meg x 16 Figure 3 (page 16) 64 Meg x 32 Figure 3 (page 16) 128 Meg x 32 Figure 4 (page 17) 192 Meg x 32 Figure 6 (page 19) 256 Meg x 32 Figure 9 (page 22) CS0# 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 2 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 2 CS1# na na 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 16 Meg x 16 x 8 banks x 2 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) CS0# 1K (A[9:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) 1K (A[9:0]) 1K (A[9:0]) CS1# na na 512 (A[8:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) 1K (A[9:0]) Architecture Die configuration Row addressing Column addressing Number of die Die per rank (CS#) 1 1 2 3 4 CS0# 1 1 1 2 2 CS1# 0 0 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 Ranks per channel 1 Table 3: Dual Channel S4 Configuration Addressing Architecture 64 Meg x 64 Figure 5 (page 18) 96 Meg x 64 Figure 8 (page 21) 128 Meg x 64 Figure 7 (page 20) Die configuration 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks 8 Meg x 32 x 8 banks Row addressing Column addressing 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) 16K (A[13:0]) CS0# 512 (A[8:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) CS1# na 512 (A[8:0]) 512 (A[8:0]) 2 3 4 Number of die Die per rank (CS#) CS0# 1 1 1 CS1# 0 1-chan A, 0-chan B 1 Ranks per channel 1 Channel A 1 2 2 Channel B 1 1 2 Note: 1. A channel is a complete LPDRAM interface, including command/address and data pins. See Package Block Diagrams (page 16) for descriptions of signal connections and die configurations for each respective architecture. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 2 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Part Numbering Figure 1: 2Gb LPDDR2 Part Numbering MT 42 L 128M16 D1 KL -25 IT :A Design Revision Micron Technology :A = First generation Product Family Operating Temperature 42 = Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM IT = -25C to +85C Operating Voltage AT = -40C to +105C L = 1.2V Cycle Time Configuration -18 = 1.8ns,tCK RL = 8 128M16 = 128 Meg x 16 -25 = 2.5ns,tCK RL = 6 64M32 = 64 Meg x 32 -3 = 3.0ns,tCK RL = 5 128M32 = 128 Meg x 32 256M32 = 256 Meg x 32 Package Codes 192M32 = 192 Meg x 32 MH = 134-ball FBGA, 11mm x 11.5mm 64M64 = 64 Meg x 64 MG = 134-ball FBGA, 11.5mm x 11.5mm 96M64 = 96 Meg x 64 KL, KP, LE = 168-ball FBGA, 12mm x 12mm 128M64 = 128 Meg x 64 KH, KJ, KU = 216-ball FBGA, 12mm x 12mm LD, MP = 220-ball FBGA, 14mm x 14mm Addressing D1 = LPDDR2, 1 die D2 = LPDDR2, 2 die D3 = LPDDR2, 3 die D4 = LPDDR2, 4 die FBGA Part Marking Decoder Due to space limitations, FBGA-packaged components have an abbreviated part marking that is different from the part number. Micron's FBGA part marking decoder is available at www.micron.com/decoder. In timing diagrams, "CMD" is used as an indicator only. Actual signals occur on CA[9:0]. VREF indicates V REFCA and V REFDQ. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 3 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Contents General Description ....................................................................................................................................... 11 General Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 11 IDD Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 12 Package Block Diagrams ................................................................................................................................. 16 Package Dimensions ....................................................................................................................................... 23 Ball Assignments and Descriptions ................................................................................................................. 33 Functional Description ................................................................................................................................... 39 Power-Up ....................................................................................................................................................... 40 Initialization After RESET (Without Voltage Ramp) ...................................................................................... 42 Power-Off ....................................................................................................................................................... 42 Uncontrolled Power-Off .............................................................................................................................. 43 Mode Register Definition ................................................................................................................................ 43 Mode Register Assignments and Definitions ................................................................................................ 43 ACTIVATE Command ..................................................................................................................................... 54 8-Bank Device Operation ............................................................................................................................ 54 Read and Write Access Modes ......................................................................................................................... 55 Burst READ Command ................................................................................................................................... 55 READs Interrupted by a READ ..................................................................................................................... 62 Burst WRITE Command .................................................................................................................................. 62 WRITEs Interrupted by a WRITE ................................................................................................................. 65 BURST TERMINATE Command ...................................................................................................................... 65 Write Data Mask ............................................................................................................................................. 67 PRECHARGE Command ................................................................................................................................. 68 READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE ......................................................................................................... 69 WRITE Burst Followed by PRECHARGE ....................................................................................................... 70 Auto Precharge ........................................................................................................................................... 71 READ Burst with Auto Precharge ................................................................................................................. 71 WRITE Burst with Auto Precharge ............................................................................................................... 72 REFRESH Command ...................................................................................................................................... 74 REFRESH Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 80 SELF REFRESH Operation ............................................................................................................................... 82 Partial-Array Self Refresh - Bank Masking .................................................................................................... 83 Partial-Array Self Refresh - Segment Masking .............................................................................................. 84 MODE REGISTER READ ................................................................................................................................. 85 Temperature Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 87 DQ Calibration ........................................................................................................................................... 89 MODE REGISTER WRITE Command ............................................................................................................... 91 MRW RESET Command .............................................................................................................................. 91 MRW ZQ Calibration Commands ................................................................................................................ 92 ZQ External Resistor Value, Tolerance, and Capacitive Loading ..................................................................... 94 Power-Down .................................................................................................................................................. 94 Deep Power-Down ........................................................................................................................................ 101 Input Clock Frequency Changes and Stop Events ............................................................................................ 102 Input Clock Frequency Changes and Clock Stop with CKE LOW .................................................................. 102 Input Clock Frequency Changes and Clock Stop with CKE HIGH ................................................................. 103 NO OPERATION Command ........................................................................................................................... 103 Simplified Bus Interface State Diagram ....................................................................................................... 103 Truth Tables .................................................................................................................................................. 105 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 113 Absolute Maximum Ratings ....................................................................................................................... 113 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 4 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Input/Output Capacitance ......................................................................................................................... 113 Electrical Specifications - IDD Specifications and Conditions ........................................................................... 114 AC and DC Operating Conditions ................................................................................................................... 117 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals ............................................................. 119 VREF Tolerances ......................................................................................................................................... 120 Input Signal .............................................................................................................................................. 121 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals ................................................................ 123 Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals .................................................................................... 124 Differential Input Crosspoint Voltage ......................................................................................................... 126 Input Slew Rate ......................................................................................................................................... 127 Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions ........................................................................................... 127 Single-Ended Output Slew Rate .................................................................................................................. 128 Differential Output Slew Rate ..................................................................................................................... 129 HSUL_12 Driver Output Timing Reference Load ......................................................................................... 131 Output Driver Impedance .............................................................................................................................. 131 Output Driver Impedance Characteristics with ZQ Calibration .................................................................... 132 Output Driver Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity ..................................................................................... 133 Output Impedance Characteristics Without ZQ Calibration ......................................................................... 133 Clock Specification ........................................................................................................................................ 137 tCK(abs), tCH(abs), and tCL(abs) ................................................................................................................ 138 Clock Period Jitter .......................................................................................................................................... 138 Clock Period Jitter Effects on Core Timing Parameters ................................................................................. 138 Cycle Time Derating for Core Timing Parameters ........................................................................................ 139 Clock Cycle Derating for Core Timing Parameters ....................................................................................... 139 Clock Jitter Effects on Command/Address Timing Parameters ..................................................................... 139 Clock Jitter Effects on READ Timing Parameters .......................................................................................... 139 Clock Jitter Effects on WRITE Timing Parameters ........................................................................................ 140 Refresh Requirements .................................................................................................................................... 141 AC Timing ..................................................................................................................................................... 142 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating ........................................................................................................... 149 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating ....................................................................................................... 156 Revision History ............................................................................................................................................ 163 Rev. N, Production - 3/12 ........................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. M, Production - 10/11 ........................................................................................................................ 163 Rev. L, Production - 09/11 .......................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. K, Production - 08/11 ......................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. J, Production - 05/11 .......................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. H, Production - 3/11 ........................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. G, Production - 1/11 ........................................................................................................................... 163 Rev. F, Advance - 11/10 .............................................................................................................................. 163 Rev. E, Advance - 09/10 .............................................................................................................................. 163 Rev. D, Advance - 07/10 ............................................................................................................................. 163 Rev. C, Advance - 07/10 ............................................................................................................................. 164 Rev. B, Advance - 03/10 .............................................................................................................................. 164 Rev. A, Advance - 03/10 .............................................................................................................................. 164 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 5 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features List of Figures Figure 1: 2Gb LPDDR2 Part Numbering ............................................................................................................ 3 Figure 2: Typical Self-Refresh Current vs. Temperature .................................................................................... 15 Figure 3: Single Rank, Single Channel Package Block Diagram ......................................................................... 16 Figure 4: Dual Rank, Single Channel Package Block Diagram ........................................................................... 17 Figure 5: Single Rank, Dual Channel Package Block Diagram ........................................................................... 18 Figure 6: Dual Rank, Single Channel (3 Die) Package Block Diagram ................................................................ 19 Figure 7: Dual Rank, Dual Channel Package Block Diagram ............................................................................ 20 Figure 8: Dual Rank, Dual Channel (3 Die) Package Block Diagram .................................................................. 21 Figure 9: Dual Rank, Single Channel (4 Die) Package Block Diagram ................................................................ 22 Figure 10: 134-Ball FBGA - 11mm x 11.5mm (Package Code MH) .................................................................... 23 Figure 11: 134-Ball FBGA - 11.5mm x 11.5mm (Package Code MG) .................................................................. 24 Figure 12: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KL) ......................................................................... 25 Figure 13: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KP) ......................................................................... 26 Figure 14: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code LE) ......................................................................... 27 Figure 15: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KH) ........................................................................ 28 Figure 16: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KJ) ......................................................................... 29 Figure 17: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KU) ........................................................................ 30 Figure 18: 220-Ball FBGA - 14mm x 14mm (Package Code MP) ........................................................................ 31 Figure 19: 220-Ball FBGA - 14mm x 14mm (Package Code LD) ........................................................................ 32 Figure 20: 134-Ball FBGA (x16, x32) ................................................................................................................ 33 Figure 21: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm Single- and Dual-Die Package (SDP, DDP) ...................................... 34 Figure 22: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm Triple- and Quad-Die Package (3DP, QDP) ...................................... 35 Figure 23: 216-Ball 2-Channel FBGA - 12mm x 12mm ..................................................................................... 36 Figure 24: 220-Ball 2-Channel FBGA - 14mm x 14mm ..................................................................................... 37 Figure 25: Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 39 Figure 26: Voltage Ramp and Initialization Sequence ...................................................................................... 42 Figure 27: ACTIVATE Command .................................................................................................................... 54 Figure 28: tFAW Timing (8-Bank Devices) ....................................................................................................... 55 Figure 29: READ Output Timing - tDQSCK (MAX) ........................................................................................... 56 Figure 30: READ Output Timing - tDQSCK (MIN) ........................................................................................... 56 Figure 31: Burst READ - RL = 5, BL = 4, tDQSCK > tCK ..................................................................................... 57 Figure 32: Burst READ - RL = 3, BL = 8, tDQSCK < tCK ..................................................................................... 57 Figure 33: tDQSCKDL Timing ........................................................................................................................ 58 Figure 34: tDQSCKDM Timing ....................................................................................................................... 59 Figure 35: tDQSCKDS Timing ......................................................................................................................... 60 Figure 36: Burst READ Followed by Burst WRITE - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 ......................................................... 61 Figure 37: Seamless Burst READ - RL = 3, BL = 4, tCCD = 2 .............................................................................. 61 Figure 38: READ Burst Interrupt Example - RL = 3, BL = 8, tCCD = 2 ................................................................. 62 Figure 39: Data Input (WRITE) Timing ........................................................................................................... 63 Figure 40: Burst WRITE - WL = 1, BL = 4 ......................................................................................................... 63 Figure 41: Burst WRITE Followed by Burst READ - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 ......................................................... 64 Figure 42: Seamless Burst WRITE - WL = 1, BL = 4, tCCD = 2 ............................................................................ 64 Figure 43: WRITE Burst Interrupt Timing - WL = 1, BL = 8, tCCD = 2 ................................................................ 65 Figure 44: Burst WRITE Truncated by BST - WL = 1, BL = 16 ............................................................................ 66 Figure 45: Burst READ Truncated by BST - RL = 3, BL = 16 ............................................................................... 67 Figure 46: Data Mask Timing ......................................................................................................................... 67 Figure 47: Write Data Mask - Second Data Bit Masked .................................................................................... 68 Figure 48: READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - RL = 3, BL = 8, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 2 ................................ 69 Figure 49: READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - RL = 3, BL = 4, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 3 ................................ 70 Figure 50: WRITE Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - WL = 1, BL = 4 .................................................................. 71 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 6 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Figure 51: READ Burst with Auto Precharge - RL = 3, BL = 4, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 2 ........................................ 72 Figure 52: WRITE Burst with Auto Precharge - WL = 1, BL = 4 .......................................................................... 73 Figure 53: Regular Distributed Refresh Pattern ............................................................................................... 77 Figure 54: Supported Transition from Repetitive REFRESH Burst .................................................................... 78 Figure 55: Nonsupported Transition from Repetitive REFRESH Burst .............................................................. 79 Figure 56: Recommended Self Refresh Entry and Exit ..................................................................................... 80 Figure 57: tSRF Definition .............................................................................................................................. 81 Figure 58: All-Bank REFRESH Operation ........................................................................................................ 81 Figure 59: Per-Bank REFRESH Operation ....................................................................................................... 82 Figure 60: SELF REFRESH Operation .............................................................................................................. 83 Figure 61: MRR Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 ...................................................................................................... 85 Figure 62: READ to MRR Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 ......................................................................................... 86 Figure 63: Burst WRITE Followed by MRR - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 ................................................................... 87 Figure 64: Temperature Sensor Timing ........................................................................................................... 89 Figure 65: MR32 and MR40 DQ Calibration Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 ............................................................. 90 Figure 66: MODE REGISTER WRITE Timing - RL = 3, tMRW = 5 ....................................................................... 91 Figure 67: ZQ Timings ................................................................................................................................... 93 Figure 68: Power-Down Entry and Exit Timing ................................................................................................ 95 Figure 69: CKE Intensive Environment ........................................................................................................... 95 Figure 70: REFRESH-to-REFRESH Timing in CKE Intensive Environments ...................................................... 95 Figure 71: READ to Power-Down Entry ........................................................................................................... 96 Figure 72: READ with Auto Precharge to Power-Down Entry ............................................................................ 97 Figure 73: WRITE to Power-Down Entry ......................................................................................................... 98 Figure 74: WRITE with Auto Precharge to Power-Down Entry .......................................................................... 99 Figure 75: REFRESH Command to Power-Down Entry ................................................................................... 100 Figure 76: ACTIVATE Command to Power-Down Entry .................................................................................. 100 Figure 77: PRECHARGE Command to Power-Down Entry .............................................................................. 100 Figure 78: MRR Command to Power-Down Entry .......................................................................................... 101 Figure 79: MRW Command to Power-Down Entry ......................................................................................... 101 Figure 80: Deep Power-Down Entry and Exit Timing ...................................................................................... 102 Figure 81: Simplified Bus Interface State Diagram .......................................................................................... 104 Figure 82: V REF DC Tolerance and V REF AC Noise Limits ................................................................................. 120 Figure 83: LPDDR2-466 to LPDDR2-1066 Input Signal ................................................................................... 121 Figure 84: LPDDR2-200 to LPDDR2-400 Input Signal ..................................................................................... 122 Figure 85: Differential AC Swing Time and tDVAC .......................................................................................... 123 Figure 86: Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals ....................................................................... 125 Figure 87: V IX Definition ............................................................................................................................... 126 Figure 88: Differential Input Slew Rate Definition for CK, CK#, DQS, and DQS# ............................................... 127 Figure 89: Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition ..................................................................................... 128 Figure 90: Differential Output Slew Rate Definition ........................................................................................ 129 Figure 91: Overshoot and Undershoot Definition ........................................................................................... 130 Figure 92: HSUL_12 Driver Output Reference Load for Timing and Slew Rate ................................................. 131 Figure 93: Output Driver ............................................................................................................................... 132 Figure 94: Output Impedance = 240 Ohms, I-V Curves After ZQRESET ............................................................ 135 Figure 95: Output Impedance = 240 Ohms, I-V Curves After Calibration ......................................................... 136 Figure 96: Command Input Setup and Hold Timing ....................................................................................... 149 Figure 97: Typical Slew Rate and tVAC - tIS for CA and CS# Relative to Clock ................................................... 152 Figure 98: Typical Slew Rate - tIH for CA and CS# Relative to Clock ................................................................. 153 Figure 99: Tangent Line - tIS for CA and CS# Relative to Clock ........................................................................ 154 Figure 100: Tangent Line - tIH for CA and CS# Relative to Clock ..................................................................... 155 Figure 101: Typical Slew Rate and tVAC - tDS for DQ Relative to Strobe ........................................................... 159 Figure 102: Typical Slew Rate - tDH for DQ Relative to Strobe ......................................................................... 160 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 7 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Figure 103: Tangent Line - tDS for DQ with Respect to Strobe ......................................................................... 161 Figure 104: Tangent Line - tDH for DQ with Respect to Strobe ........................................................................ 162 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 8 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features List of Tables Table 1: Key Timing Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 1 Table 2: Single Channel S4 Configuration Addressing ........................................................................................ 2 Table 3: Dual Channel S4 Configuration Addressing .......................................................................................... 2 Table 4: 128 Meg x 16 IDD Specifications ......................................................................................................... 12 Table 5: 64 Meg x 32 IDD Specifications ........................................................................................................... 13 Table 6: IDD6 Partial-Array Self Refresh Current ............................................................................................... 15 Table 7: Ball/Pad Descriptions ....................................................................................................................... 38 Table 8: Initialization Timing Parameters ....................................................................................................... 42 Table 9: Power-Off Timing ............................................................................................................................. 43 Table 10: Mode Register Assignments ............................................................................................................. 44 Table 11: MR0 Device Information (MA[7:0] = 00h) ......................................................................................... 45 Table 12: MR0 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 45 Table 13: MR1 Device Feature 1 (MA[7:0] = 01h) .............................................................................................. 45 Table 14: MR1 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 45 Table 15: Burst Sequence by Burst Length (BL), Burst Type (BT), and Wrap Control (WC) ................................. 46 Table 16: No-Wrap Restrictions ...................................................................................................................... 47 Table 17: MR2 Device Feature 2 (MA[7:0] = 02h) .............................................................................................. 47 Table 18: MR2 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 48 Table 19: MR3 I/O Configuration 1 (MA[7:0] = 03h) ......................................................................................... 48 Table 20: MR3 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 48 Table 21: MR4 Device Temperature (MA[7:0] = 04h) ........................................................................................ 48 Table 22: MR4 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 49 Table 23: MR5 Basic Configuration 1 (MA[7:0] = 05h) ...................................................................................... 49 Table 24: MR5 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 49 Table 25: MR6 Basic Configuration 2 (MA[7:0] = 06h) ...................................................................................... 49 Table 26: MR6 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 50 Table 27: MR7 Basic Configuration 3 (MA[7:0] = 07h) ...................................................................................... 50 Table 28: MR7 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 50 Table 29: MR8 Basic Configuration 4 (MA[7:0] = 08h) ...................................................................................... 50 Table 30: MR8 Op-Code Bit Definitions .......................................................................................................... 50 Table 31: MR9 Test Mode (MA[7:0] = 09h) ....................................................................................................... 51 Table 32: MR10 Calibration (MA[7:0] = 0Ah) ................................................................................................... 51 Table 33: MR10 Op-Code Bit Definitions ........................................................................................................ 51 Table 34: MR[11:15] Reserved (MA[7:0] = 0Bh-0Fh) ......................................................................................... 51 Table 35: MR16 PASR Bank Mask (MA[7:0] = 010h) .......................................................................................... 51 Table 36: MR16 Op-Code Bit Definitions ........................................................................................................ 51 Table 37: MR17 PASR Segment Mask (MA[7:0] = 011h) .................................................................................... 52 Table 38: MR17 PASR Segment Mask Definitions ............................................................................................ 52 Table 39: MR17 PASR Row Address Ranges in Masked Segments ...................................................................... 52 Table 40: Reserved Mode Registers ................................................................................................................. 52 Table 41: MR63 RESET (MA[7:0] = 3Fh) - MRW Only ....................................................................................... 53 Table 42: Bank Selection for PRECHARGE by Address Bits ............................................................................... 69 Table 43: PRECHARGE and Auto Precharge Clarification ................................................................................. 73 Table 44: REFRESH Command Scheduling Separation Requirements .............................................................. 75 Table 45: Bank and Segment Masking Example ............................................................................................... 84 Table 46: Temperature Sensor Definitions and Operating Conditions .............................................................. 88 Table 47: Data Calibration Pattern Description ............................................................................................... 90 Table 48: Truth Table for MRR and MRW ........................................................................................................ 91 Table 49: Command Truth Table ................................................................................................................... 105 Table 50: CKE Truth Table ............................................................................................................................. 106 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 9 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Features Table 51: Table 52: Table 53: Table 54: Table 55: Table 56: Table 57: Table 58: Table 59: Table 60: Table 61: Table 62: Table 63: Table 64: Table 65: Table 66: Table 67: Table 68: Table 69: Table 70: Table 71: Table 72: Table 73: Table 74: Table 75: Table 76: Table 77: Table 78: Table 79: Table 80: Table 81: Table 82: Table 83: Table 84: Table 85: Table 86: Table 87: Table 88: Table 89: Table 90: Table 91: Table 92: Table 93: Table 94: Table 95: Table 96: Current State Bank n to Command to Bank n Truth Table ................................................................ 107 Current State Bank n to Command to Bank m Truth Table ............................................................... 109 DM Truth Table .............................................................................................................................. 112 Absolute Maximum DC Ratings ...................................................................................................... 113 Input/Output Capacitance ............................................................................................................. 113 Switching for CA Input Signals ........................................................................................................ 114 Switching for IDD4R ......................................................................................................................... 115 Switching for IDD4W ........................................................................................................................ 115 IDD Specification Parameters and Operating Conditions .................................................................. 115 Recommended DC Operating Conditions ....................................................................................... 117 Input Leakage Current ................................................................................................................... 118 Operating Temperature Range ........................................................................................................ 118 Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for CA and CS# Inputs ........................................................... 119 Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for CKE ................................................................................ 119 Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for DQ and DM ..................................................................... 119 Differential AC and DC Input Levels ................................................................................................ 123 CK/CK# and DQS/DQS# Time Requirements Before Ringback ( tDVAC) ............................................ 124 Single-Ended Levels for CK, CK#, DQS, DQS# .................................................................................. 125 Crosspoint Voltage for Differential Input Signals (CK, CK#, DQS, DQS#) ........................................... 126 Differential Input Slew Rate Definition ............................................................................................ 127 Single-Ended AC and DC Output Levels .......................................................................................... 127 Differential AC and DC Output Levels ............................................................................................. 128 Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition ...................................................................................... 128 Single-Ended Output Slew Rate ...................................................................................................... 128 Differential Output Slew Rate Definition ......................................................................................... 129 Differential Output Slew Rate ......................................................................................................... 129 AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification ......................................................................................... 130 Output Driver DC Electrical Characteristics with ZQ Calibration ...................................................... 132 Output Driver Sensitivity Definition ................................................................................................ 133 Output Driver Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity ......................................................................... 133 Output Driver DC Electrical Characteristics Without ZQ Calibration ................................................ 133 I-V Curves ..................................................................................................................................... 134 Definitions and Calculations .......................................................................................................... 137 tCK(abs), tCH(abs), and tCL(abs) Definitions ................................................................................... 138 Refresh Requirement Parameters (Per Density) ............................................................................... 141 AC Timing ..................................................................................................................................... 142 CA and CS# Setup and Hold Base Values (>400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) ............................................ 150 CA and CS# Setup and Hold Base Values (<400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) ............................................ 150 Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tIS/tIH (AC220) ........................................................................... 150 Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tIS/tIH (AC300) ........................................................................... 151 Required Time for Valid Transition - tVAC > V IH(AC) and < V IL(AC) ....................................................... 151 Data Setup and Hold Base Values (>400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) ....................................................... 156 Data Setup and Hold Base Values (<400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) ....................................................... 157 Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tDS/tDH (AC220) ........................................................................ 157 Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tDS/tDH (AC300) ........................................................................ 157 Required Time for Valid Transition - tVAC > V IH(AC) or < V IL(AC) ......................................................... 158 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 10 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 General Description General Description The 2Gb Mobile Low-Power DDR2 SDRAM (LPDDR2) is a high-speed CMOS, dynamic random-access memory containing 2,147,483,648 bits. The LPDDR2-S4 device is internally configured as an eight-bank DRAM. Each of the x16's 268,435,456-bit banks is organized as 16,384 rows by 1024 columns by 16 bits. Each of the x32's 268,435,456-bit banks is organized as 16,384 rows by 512 columns by 32 bits. General Notes Throughout the data sheet, figures and text refer to DQs as "DQ." DQ should be interpreted as any or all DQ collectively, unless specifically stated otherwise. "DQS" and "CK" should be interpreted as DQS, DQS# and CK, CK# respectively, unless specifically stated otherwise. "BA" includes all BA pins used for a given density. Complete functionality may be described throughout the entire document. Any page or diagram may have been simplified to convey a topic and may not be inclusive of all requirements. Any specific requirement takes precedence over a general statement. Any functionality not specifically stated herein is considered undefined, illegal, is not supported, and will result in unknown operation. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 11 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 IDD Specifications IDD Specifications Table 4: 128 Meg x 16 IDD Specifications VDD2, VDDQ, VDDCA = 1.14-1.30V; VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V Speed Grade Parameter PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Supply -18 -25 -3 Unit IDD01 VDD1 20 20 20 mA IDD02 VDD2 65 50 47 IDD0,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD2P1 VDD1 500 500 500 IDD2P2 VDD2 1600 1600 1600 IDD2P,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD2PS1 VDD1 500 500 500 IDD2PS2 VDD2 1600 1600 1600 IDD2PS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD2N1 VDD1 1.7 1.7 1.7 IDD2N2 VDD2 16 15 15 IDD2N,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD2NS1 VDD1 1.7 1.7 1.7 IDD2NS2 VDD2 16 15 15 IDD2NS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 A A mA mA IDD3P1 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 A IDD3P2 VDD2 4 4 4 mA IDD3P,in VDDCA + VDDQ 120 120 120 A IDD3PS1 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 A IDD3PS2 VDD2 4 4 4 mA IDD3PS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 120 120 120 A IDD3N1 VDD1 1.2 1.2 1.2 mA IDD3N2 VDD2 24 23 23 IDD3N,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD3NS1 VDD1 1.2 1.2 1.2 IDD3NS2 VDD2 24 23 23 IDD3NS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD4R1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD4R2 VDD2 220 210 200 IDD4R,in VDDCA 6 6 6 IDD4W1 VDD1 10 10 10 IDD4W2 VDD2 180 175 175 IDD4W,in VDDCA + VDDQ 28 28 28 12 mA mA mA Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 IDD Specifications Table 4: 128 Meg x 16 IDD Specifications (Continued) VDD2, VDDQ, VDDCA = 1.14-1.30V; VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V Speed Grade Parameter Supply -18 -25 -3 Unit VDD1 15 15 15 mA IDD52 VDD2 130 130 130 IDD5,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD5PB1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD5PB2 VDD2 18 18 18 IDD5PB,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD5AB1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD5AB2 VDD2 18 18 18 IDD5AB,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD51 IDD61 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 IDD62 VDD2 2500 2500 2500 IDD6,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD81 VDD1 7.5 7.5 7.5 IDD82 VDD2 30 30 30 IDD8,in VDDCA + VDDQ 15 15 15 mA mA A A Table 5: 64 Meg x 32 IDD Specifications VDD2, VDDQ, VDDCA = 1.14-1.30V; VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V Speed Grade Parameter Supply -18 -25 -3 Unit VDD1 20 20 20 mA IDD02 VDD2 65 50 47 IDD0,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD2P1 VDD1 500 500 500 IDD2P2 VDD2 1600 1600 1600 IDD01 IDD2P,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD2PS1 VDD1 500 500 500 IDD2PS2 VDD2 1600 1600 1600 IDD2PS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD2N1 VDD1 1.7 1.7 1.7 mA IDD2N2 VDD2 16 15 15 mA IDD2N,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD2NS1 VDD1 1.7 1.7 1.7 IDD2NS2 VDD2 16 15 15 IDD2NS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 IDD3P1 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN A 13 A mA A Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 IDD Specifications Table 5: 64 Meg x 32 IDD Specifications (Continued) VDD2, VDDQ, VDDCA = 1.14-1.30V; VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V Speed Grade Parameter PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Supply -18 -25 -3 Unit IDD3P2 VDD2 4 4 4 mA IDD3P,in VDDCA + VDDQ 120 120 120 A IDD3PS1 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 A IDD3PS2 VDD2 4 4 4 mA IDD3PS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 120 120 120 A IDD3N1 VDD1 1.2 1.2 1.2 mA IDD3N2 VDD2 24 23 23 mA IDD3N,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD3NS1 VDD1 1.2 1.2 1.2 IDD3NS2 VDD2 24 23 23 IDD3NS,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD4R1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD4R2 VDD2 220 210 200 IDD4R,in VDDCA 6 6 6 IDD4W1 VDD1 10 10 10 IDD4W2 VDD2 185 175 175 IDD4W,in VDDCA + VDDQ 28 28 28 IDD51 VDD1 15 15 15 IDD52 VDD2 130 130 130 IDD5,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD5PB1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD5PB2 VDD2 18 18 18 IDD5PB,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDDAB1 VDD1 5 5 5 IDD5AB2 VDD2 18 18 18 IDD5AB,in VDDCA + VDDQ 6 6 6 IDD61 VDD1 1200 1200 1200 IDD62 VDD2 2500 2500 2500 IDD6,in VDDCA + VDDQ 100 100 100 IDD81 VDD1 7.5 7.5 7.5 IDD82 VDD2 30 30 30 IDD8,in VDDCA + VDDQ 15 15 15 14 mA mA mA mA mA mA A A Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 IDD Specifications Table 6: IDD6 Partial-Array Self Refresh Current VDD2, VDDQ, VDDCA = 1.14-1.30V; VDD1 = 1.70-1.95V PASR Supply Full array 1/2 array 1/4 array 1/8 array Value Unit VDD1 1200 A VDD2 2500 VDDi 75 VDD1 1000 VDD2 2000 VDDi 75 VDD1 900 VDD2 1700 VDDi 75 VDD1 900 VDD2 1500 VDDi 75 Figure 2: Typical Self-Refresh Current vs. Temperature 3000 Full Half 2500 Quarter Eighth IDD62 (A) 2000 1500 1000 500 0 -40 0 25 30 35 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 90 95 100 105 Temperature PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 15 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Package Block Diagrams Figure 3: Single Rank, Single Channel Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA VREFDQ ZQ CS0# RZQ CKE0 CK CK# DM LPDDR2 Die 0 CA[9:0] DQ, DQS PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 16 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 4: Dual Rank, Single Channel Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA VREFDQ CS1# CKE1 ZQ0 CS0# RZQ CKE0 CK CK# DM LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 0 Die 1 CA[9:0] DQ[31:0], DQS Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. For the 168-ball JEDEC PoP ballout employing only a single ZQ connection, the RZQ resistor is connected to ZQ. 17 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 5: Single Rank, Dual Channel Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA(b) VREFDQ(b) ZQ CS0# RZQ CKE0 CK# CK DM LPDDR2 Channel B Die 0 CA[9:0] DQ[31:0], DQS DQ[31:0], DQS CA[9:0] DM CK LPDDR2 Die 1 CK# Channel A CKE0 CS0# ZQ RZQ VREFCA(a) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN VREFDQ(a) 18 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 6: Dual Rank, Single Channel (3 Die) Package Block Diagram 95()&$ 95()'4 9'' 9'' 9''4 9''&$ 966 &6 &6 &.( &.( &. /3''5 &. [ [ '0 'LH 'LH /3''5 /3''5 [ 'LH '46'46 &$ =4 =4 5=4 5=4 '4>@ '4>@ '4>@ '4>@ PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 19 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 7: Dual Rank, Dual Channel Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA(b) VREFDQ(b) CS1# CKE1 ZQ CS0# RZQ CKE0 CK CK# DM LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 0 Die 1 Channel B CA[9:0] DQ[31:0], DQS DQ[31:0], DQS CA[9:0] DM CK LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 2 Die 3 CK# Channel A CKE0 CS0# ZQ RZQ CKE1 CS1# VREFCA(a) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN VREFDQ(a) 20 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 8: Dual Rank, Dual Channel (3 Die) Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA(a) VREFDQ(a) CS1# CKE1 ZQ CS0# RZQ CKE0 CK CK# DM LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 0 Die 1 Channel A CA[9:0] DQ[31:0], DQS DQ[31:0], DQS CA[9:0] DM CK LPDDR2 Die 2 Channel B CK# CKE0 CS0# ZQ RZQ VREFCA(b) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN VREFDQ(b) 21 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Block Diagrams Figure 9: Dual Rank, Single Channel (4 Die) Package Block Diagram VDD1 VDD2 VDDQ VDDCA VSS VREFCA VREFDQ CS0# CKE0 LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 0 Die 1 CK RZQ1 CK# ZQ1 DM DQ[31:16], DQS2/DQS2#, DQS3/DQS3# CA[9:0] DQ[15:0], DQS0/DQS0#, DQS1/DQS1# ZQ0 RZQ0 LPDDR2 LPDDR2 Die 2 Die 3 CKE1 CS1# PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 22 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Package Dimensions Figure 10: 134-Ball FBGA - 11mm x 11.5mm (Package Code MH) Seating plane A 134X O0.36 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.3 SMD ball pads. 0.08 A Pin A1 index (covered by SR) Pin A1 index 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D E F 11.5 0.1 G H 10.4 CTR J K L M N P R T U 0.65 TYP 0.9 0.1 0.65 TYP 5.85 CTR 0.22 MIN 11 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: LF35 (98.25% Sn, 1.2% Ag, 0.5% Cu, 0.05% Ni). 23 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 11: 134-Ball FBGA - 11.5mm x 11.5mm (Package Code MG) Seating plane A 134X O0.36 Dimensions apply to solder balls postreflow on O0.3 SMD ball pads. 0.08 A Pin A1 index (covered by SR) Pin A1 index 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U 11.5 0.1 10.4 CTR 0.65 TYP 1.1 0.1 0.65 TYP 5.85 CTR 0.22 MIN 11.5 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: LF35 (98.25% Sn, 1.2% Ag, 0.5% Cu, 0.05% Ni). 24 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 12: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KL) Seating plane 0.08 A A 168X O0.34 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.28 SMD ball pads. 22 23 20 21 18 19 16 17 14 15 12 13 10 11 8 9 6 7 4 5 Pin A1 index 2 3 Pin A1 index 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC 11 CTR 12 0.1 0.5 TYP 0.5 TYP 0.70.1 11 CTR 0.23 MIN 12 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 25 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 13: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KP) Seating plane A 168X O0.34 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.28 SMD ball pads. 0.08 A Ball A1 ID Ball A1 ID 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC 11 CTR 12 0.1 0.5 TYP 0.9 0.1 0.5 TYP 11 CTR 0.21 MIN 12 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 26 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 14: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code LE) Seating plane A 168X O0.362 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.28 SMD ball pads. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 0.1 A Ball A1 ID Ball A1 ID 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC 11.0 CTR 12 0.1 0.5 TYP 0.9 0.1 0.5 TYP 11.0 CTR 0.27 MIN 12 0.1 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 27 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 15: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KH) Seating plane 0.08 A 216X O0.27 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.24 SMD ball pads. A Pin A1 index 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ Pin A1 index 11.2 CTR 12 0.1 0.4 TYP 0.4 TYP 0.7 0.1 0.155 MIN 11.2 CTR 12 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 28 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 16: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KJ) Seating plane A 216X O0.27 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.24 SMD ball pads. 0.08 A Pin A1 index Pin A1 index 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ 11.2 CTR 12 0.1 0.4 TYP 0.9 0.1 0.4 TYP 11.2 CTR 0.155 MIN 12 0.1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 2. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 29 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 17: 216-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm (Package Code KU) Seating plane A 216X O0.27 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on O0.24 SMD ball pads. Solder ball material: SAC105 (98.5% Sn, 1% Ag, 0.5% Cu). 0.08 A Ball A1 ID Ball A1 ID 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ 11.2 CTR 12 0.1 0.4 TYP 0.8 0.1 0.4 TYP 11.2 CTR 0.155 MIN 12 0.1 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 30 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 18: 220-Ball FBGA - 14mm x 14mm (Package Code MP) Seating plane A 220X 0.34 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow on 0.27 SMD OSP ball pads. 0.08 A Ball A1 ID (covered by SR) Ball A1 ID 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE AF AG 13.0 CTR 14 0.1 0.5 TYP 0.7 0.1 0.5 TYP 13.0 CTR 0.24 MIN 14 0.1 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 31 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Package Dimensions Figure 19: 220-Ball FBGA - 14mm x 14mm (Package Code LD) Seating plane A 220X O0.34 Dimensions apply to solder balls post-reflow onO0.27 SMD ball pads. 0.08 A Ball A1 ID (covered by SR) Ball A1 ID 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R T U V W Y AA AB AC AD AE AF AG 13.0 CTR 14 0.1 0.5 TYP 0.9 0.1 0.5 TYP 13.0 CTR 0.24 MIN 14 0.1 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. All dimensions are in millimeters. 32 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Ball Assignments and Descriptions Figure 20: 134-Ball FBGA (x16, x32) 1 2 A DNU DNU B DNU NC NC C V DD1 V SS ZQ1 D V SS V DD2 E V SSCA 3 5 6 9 10 DNU DNU A DQ31 DQ29 DQ26 DNU B V SSQ V DDQ C ZQ0 V DDQ DQ30 DQ27 DQS3 DQS3# V SSQ D CA9 CA8 DQ28 DQ24 V SSQ E F V DDCA CA6 CA7 V SSQ DQ11 DQ13 DQ14 DQ12 V DDQ F G V DD2 4 V DD2 V DD1 V SS V SSQ 7 8 V DDQ DQ25 DM3 DQ15 V DDQ DQS1# DQS1 DQ10 DQ9 CA5 V REFCA DQ8 V SSQ G H V DDCA V SS CK# DM1 V DDQ J V SSCA NC CK V SSQ V DDQ K CKE0 CKE1 RFU DM0 V DDQ L CS0# CS1# RFU DQS0# DQS0 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 V SSQ L M CA4 CA3 CA2 V SSQ DQ4 DQ2 DQ1 DQ3 V DDQ M CA1 DQ19 DQ23 DM2 DQ0 V DDQ V SSQ N V DDQ DQ17 DQ20 DQS2 DQS2# V SSQ P N V SSCA V DDCA P V SS VDD2 CA0 R V DD1 V SS NC T DNU NC NC U DNU DNU 1 2 3 V SS V SSQ V DD2 V DD1 4 6 5 H V DD2 V SS J V REFDQ K V SSQ V DDQ R DQ16 DQ18 DQ21 DNU T DNU DNU U 9 10 VDDQ DQ22 7 8 Top View (ball down) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 33 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Figure 21: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm Single- and Dual-Die Package (SDP, DDP) 1 2 3 4 5 A DNU DNU NC NC NC (NC) 1 NC NC (NC) 1 NC B DNU DNU V DD1 NC V SS NC V SS NC C V SS V DD2 D NC E NC F 21 22 23 V SS DNU DNU A V DD2 DNU DNU B V SSQ C NC V DDQ DQ14 D NC DQ12 DQ13 E V SSQ F 7 6 NC 8 9 10 11 12 V DD1 V SSQ 13 14 DQ30 DQ29 15 16 17 V SSQ DQ26 DQ25 18 19 V SSQ DQS#3 V DD1 V DD2 DQ31 V DDQ DQ28 DQ27 V DDQ DQ24 DQS3 V DDQ V SS 20 DM3 DQ15 (NC) 1 V SS DQ11 G NC NC V DDQ DQ10 G H NC NC DQ8 DQ9 H (NC) 1 V SS DQS1 V SSQ J J K NC NC V DDQ DQS#1 L NC NC V DD2 DM1 L M NC V SS VREFDQ V SS M N NC V DD1 V DD1 DM0 N P ZQ VREFCA DQS#0 V SSQ P R V SS V DD2 V DDQ DQS0 R T CA9 CA8 DQ6 DQ7 T U CA7 V DDCA DQ5 V SSQ U V DDQ DQ4 V V V SSCA CA6 K W CA5 V DDCA DQ2 DQ3 W Y CK# CK DQ1 V SSQ Y AA V SS V DD2 V DDQ DQ0 AA AB DNU DNU CS#0 CS#1 V DD1 CA1 VSSCA CA3 CA4 V DD2 V SS DQ16 V DDQ DQ18 DQ20 V DDQ DQ22 DQS2 V DDQ V DD2 DNU DNU AB AC DNU DNU CKE0 CKE1 V SS CA0 CA2 V DDCA V SS (NC) 1 NC V SSQ DQ17 DQ19 AC 5 6 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 7 8 12 13 14 V SSQ DQ21 DQ23 15 16 17 DM2 V SSQ DQS#2 V DD1 V SS DNU DNU 19 21 22 23 18 20 Top View (ball down) Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Balls indicated as (NC) are no connects, however, they could be connected together internally. 34 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Figure 22: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm Triple- and Quad-Die Package (3DP, QDP) 1 2 3 4 5 A DNU DNU NC NC NC (NC) 1 NC NC (NC) 1 NC B DNU DNU V DD1 NC V SS NC V SS NC C V SS V DD2 D NC E NC F 21 22 23 V SS DNU DNU A V DD2 DNU DNU B V SSQ C NC V DDQ DQ14 D NC DQ12 DQ13 E V SSQ F 7 6 NC 8 9 10 11 12 V DD1 V SSQ 13 14 DQ30 DQ29 15 16 17 V SSQ DQ26 DQ25 18 19 V SSQ DQS#3 V DD1 V DD2 DQ31 V DDQ DQ28 DQ27 V DDQ DQ24 DQS3 V DDQ V SS 20 DM3 DQ15 (NC) 1 V SS DQ11 G NC NC V DDQ DQ10 G H NC NC DQ8 DQ9 H (NC) 1 V SS DQS1 V SSQ J J K NC NC V DDQ DQS#1 L NC NC V DD2 DM1 L M NC V SS VREFDQ V SS M N NC V DD1 V DD1 DM0 N K P ZQ0 VREFCA DQS#0 V SSQ P R V SS V DD2 V DDQ DQS0 R T CA9 CA8 DQ6 DQ7 T U CA7 V DDCA DQ5 V SSQ U V DDQ DQ4 V V V SSCA CA6 W CA5 V DDCA DQ2 DQ3 W Y CK# CK DQ1 V SSQ Y AA V SS V DD2 V DDQ DQ0 AA AB DNU DNU CS#0 CS#1 V DD1 CA1 VSSCA CA3 CA4 V DD2 V DD2 DNU DNU AB AC DNU DNU CKE0 CKE1 V SS CA0 CA2 V DDCA V SS (NC) 1 ZQ1 AC 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 V SS 11 DQ16 V DDQ DQ18 DQ20 V DDQ DQ22 DQS2 V DDQ V SSQ DQ17 DQ19 12 13 14 V SSQ DQ21 DQ23 15 16 17 DM2 V SSQ DQS#2 V DD1 V SS DNU DNU 19 21 22 23 18 20 Top View (ball down) Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Balls indicated as (NC) are no connects, however, they could be connected together internally. 35 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Figure 23: 216-Ball 2-Channel FBGA - 12mm x 12mm 1 29 A DNU V SS V DD2 DQ30 DQ29 V SSQ DQ26 DQ25 V SSQ DQS#3 V SSQ DQ14 DQ13 V SS V DD1 V DD2 DQ11 DQ10 DQ9 DQS1 DM1 V DDQ DQS0 DQ7 DQ6 DQ4 DQ3 V SS DNU A B V SSQ NC V SSQ B C V DD1 DQ16 V DD1 V DD2 C D DQ17 V DDQ DQ1 V DDQ D E DQ18 DQ19 V SSQ DQ0 E F DM2 V DDQ F G DQ21 V DDQ DQS2 DQS#2 G H DQ22 DQ23 V SSQ DQ23 H J V SSQ V DDQ V DDQ DQ22 J K DQS#2 DQS2 DQ20 DQ21 K L DM2 DQ0 DQ19 V SSQ L M DQ1 V SSQ V DDQ DQ18 M N DQ2 V DD1 DQ16 DQ17 N P V DD2 V DD1 P 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 2 23 24 25 26 27 NC DQ31 V DDQ DQ28 DQ27 V DDQ DQ24 V DDQ DQS3 DM3 DQ15 V DDQ V SSQ VREFDQ V DD2 DQ12 V DDQ DQ8 DQS#1 V SSQ DM0 DQS#0 V SSQ V DDQ DQ5 DQ2 V SSQ DQ20 V SS V SS R V DD1 VREFDQ CA0 R T V DD2 V DD2 V DDCA CA1 T U V DDQ DQ3 V REFCA CA2 U V DQ4 V SSQ V SSCA CA3 V W DQ6 DQ5 CA4 CS#1 W Y V DDQ DQ7 CS#0 CKE1 Y AA DQS0 DQS#0 V SSCA CKE0 AA CK# AB V DDCA CA5 AC CA6 AD V SS AB DM0 V SSQ CK AC V DDQ DM1 AD DQS# 1DQS1 CA7 AE DQ8 V SSQ CA8 V DDCA AE AF DQ9 V DDQ V SSCA CA9 AF AG DQ10 DQ11 V DD2 AG ZQ AH V SSQ V DD1 V DD2 DQ13 V SSQ DQ15 DM3 DQS3 V DDQ DQ26 DQ27 V DDQ DQ30 V SSQ V DD2 VREFCA CA9 VSSCA CA7 CA6 CK# VDDCA CKE0 CS#0 CA3 CA2 CA1 V DD1 VSSCA AH AJ DNU V SS DQ12 V DDQ DQ14 V DDQ V SSQ DQS#3 DQ24 DQ25 V SSQ DQ28 DQ29 DQ31 V DD1 V SS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ZQ 17 Top View (ball down) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 36 CA8 V DDCA CA5 18 19 20 CK 21 Channel A V SSCA CKE1 CS#1 CA4 V DDCA CA0 22 23 24 25 Channel B 26 27 Supply V SS DNU 28 29 AJ Ground Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Figure 24: 220-Ball 2-Channel FBGA - 14mm x 14mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 BDQ28 VSSQ BDQ25 BDQ24 BDQS3# BDM3 BDQ15 VSSQ BDQ13 BDQ11 VSSQ BDQ9 BDQS1# BDM1 VDDQ BDQ27 BDQ26 VDDQ BDQS3 VSSQ VDDQ BDQ14 BDQ12 VDDQ BDQ10 BDQ8 BDQS1 VDDQ 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 VDD2 BDQS0# BDQ7 VSSQ VSS DNU A BDM0 BDQS0 VDDQ BDQ6 A DNU VSS VDD2 VSSQ BDQ29 B VDD1 NC VDDQ BDQ31 BDQ30 NC VDD2 B C ADQ16 ADQ17 BDQ5 B-DQ4 C D ADQ18 VDDQ VDDQ B-DQ3 D E VSSQ ADQ20 B-DQ1 VSSQ E F ADQ21 VDDQ VDDQ B-DQ0 F G VSSQ ADQ22 BDQS2 VSSQ G H ADQS2 ADQS2# BDQS2# BDQ23 H J VSSQ ADM2 BDQ22 VSSQ J K ADQ1 VDDQ VDDQ BDQ20 K L VSSQ ADQ2 BDQ18 VSSQ L M ADQ4 VDDQ VDD2 BDQ17 M N VSSQ ADQ5 VDDQ VSS N P ADQ7 VDDQ VDDCA A-CA0 P R VSSQ ADQS0# A-CA2 VSSCA R T ADM0 VDDQ A-CA3 A-CA4 T ACS_1# VSS U ACKE_0 ACKE_1 V A-CK VSSCA W VDDCA A-CA5 Y VDD2 AA A-CA7 VSS AB U VSS VSSQ V VDD2 VDD1 W VSS VDD2 Y ADQS1# ADQS1 VSSQ VSS BVREF(DQ) VDD1 ADQ19 BDQ2 ADQ23 BDM2 ADQ0 BDQ21 ADQ3 BDQ19 ADQ6 BDQ16 ADQS0 A-CA1 A- ACS_0# VREF(DQ) ADM1 A-CK# ADQ10 A- AA VSSQ ADQ9 AB ADQ8 VDDQ AC VSSQ ADQ11 A-CA9 VSSCA AC AD ADQ13 ADQ14 VDDCA VDD2 AD VSSQ ADQ15 VDD1 A-ZQ AE VSS VDDQ AF AG AE AF AG VREF(CA) A-CA6 ADQ12 ADM3 A-CA8 ADQS3 ADQS3# ADQ25 DNU VDD2 VSSQ VDDQ ADQ24 1 2 3 4 5 ADQ31 ADQ27 VDDQ ADQ29 ADQ26 VSSQ ADQ28 ADQ30 VSSQ VSS B-ZQ 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VDD2 VDD1 VDDCA B-CA9 VDD2 B-CA7 BVREF(CA) VDDCA B-CK BCKE_1 BCS_0# BCA4 VDDCA B-CA2 B-CA0 VDD2 VSS BCS_1# VSSCA B-CA3 B-CA1 VSS VDD1 DNU 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 VSSCA B-CA8 B-CA6 B-CA5 VSS VSSCA B-CK# BCKE_0 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Top View (Ball Down) Channel A PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 37 Channel B Supply Ground DRAMZQ Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Ball Assignments and Descriptions Table 7: Ball/Pad Descriptions Symbol Type Description CA[9:0] Input Command/address inputs: Provide the command and address inputs according to the command truth table. CK, CK# Input Clock: CK and CK# are differential clock inputs. All CA inputs are sampled on both rising and falling edges of CK. CS and CKE inputs are sampled at the rising edge of CK. AC timings are referenced to clock. CKE[1:0] Input Clock enable: CKE HIGH activates and CKE LOW deactivates the internal clock signals, input buffers, and output drivers. Power-saving modes are entered and exited via CKE transitions. CKE is considered part of the command code. CKE is sampled at the rising edge of CK. CS[1:0]# Input Chip select: CS# is considered part of the command code and is sampled at the rising edge of CK. DM[3:0] Input Input data mask: DM is an input mask signal for write data. Although DM balls are input-only, the DM loading is designed to match that of DQ and DQS balls. DM[3:0] is DM for each of the four data bytes, respectively. DQ[31:0] I/O Data input/output: Bidirectional data bus. DQS[3:0], DQS[3:0]# I/O Data strobe: The data strobe is bidirectional (used for read and write data) and complementary (DQS and DQS#). It is edge-aligned output with read data and centered input with write data. DQS[3:0]/DQS[3:0]# is DQS for each of the four data bytes, respectively. VDDQ Supply DQ power supply: Isolated on the die for improved noise immunity. VSSQ Supply DQ ground: Isolated on the die for improved noise immunity. VDDCA Supply Command/address power supply: Command/address power supply. VSSCA Supply Command/address ground: Isolated on the die for improved noise immunity. VDD1 Supply Core power: Supply 1. VDD2 Supply Core power: Supply 2. VSS Supply Common ground VREFCA, VREFDQ Supply Reference voltage: VREFCA is reference for command/address input buffers, VREFDQ is reference for DQ input buffers. ZQ Reference DNU - Do not use: Must be grounded or left floating. NC - No connect: Not internally connected. (NC) - No connect: Balls indicated as (NC) are no connects, however, they could be connected together internally. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN External impedance (240 ohm): This signal is used to calibrate the device output impedance for S4 devices. For S2 devices, ZQ should be tied to VDDCA. 38 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Functional Description Functional Description Mobile LPDDR2 is a high-speed SDRAM internally configured as a 4- or 8-bank memory device. LPDDR2 devices use a double data rate architecture on the command/address (CA) bus to reduce the number of input pins in the system. The 10-bit CA bus is used to transmit command, address, and bank information. Each command uses one clock cycle, during which command information is transferred on both the rising and falling edges of the clock. LPDDR2-S4 devices use a double data rate architecture on the DQ pins to achieve highspeed operation. The double data rate architecture is essentially a 4n prefetch architecture with an interface designed to transfer two data bits per DQ every clock cycle at the I/O pins. A single read or write access for the LPDDR2-S4 effectively consists of a single 4n-bit-wide, one-clock-cycle data transfer at the internal SDRAM core and four corresponding n-bit-wide, one-half-clock-cycle data transfers at the I/O pins. Read and write accesses are burst oriented; accesses start at a selected location and continue for a programmed number of locations in a programmed sequence. Accesses begin with the registration of an ACTIVATE command followed by a READ or WRITE command. The address and BA bits registered coincident with the ACTIVATE command are used to select the row and bank to be accessed. The address bits registered coincident with the READ or WRITE command are used to select the bank and the starting column location for the burst access. Figure 25: Functional Block Diagram CS# CA0 CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 CA5 CA6 CA7 CA8 CA9 Control logic Command / Address Multiplex and Decode CKE CK CK# Mode registers x Refresh x counter Rowaddress MUX Bank 7 Bank 7 Bank 6 Bank 6 Bank 5 Bank 5 Bank 4 Bank 4 Bank 3 Bank 3 Bank 2 Bank 2 Bank 1 Bank 1 Bank 0 Bank 0 rowMemory array address latch and decoder COL0 n 4n Read latch n MUX n Sense amplifier 3 Bank control logic Column- y - 1 address 1 counter/ latch I/O gating DM mask logic Column decoder DRVRS DQ0-DQn-1 DQS generator DQS, DQS# Input registers 4 4 4n 3 n DATA n 4 8 WRITE 4 FIFO Mask 4 and 4n drivers n CK, CK# CK out 4n CK in Data 4 4 DQS, DQS# 4 4 RCVRS n n n n n n n n DM COL0 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 39 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Up Power-Up The following sequence must be used to power up the device. Unless specified otherwise, this procedure is mandatory (see Figure 26 (page 42)). Power-up and initialization by means other than those specified will result in undefined operation. 1. Voltage Ramp While applying power (after Ta), CKE must be held LOW (0.2 x V DDCA), and all other inputs must be between V ILmin and V IHmax. The device outputs remain at High-Z while CKE is held LOW. On or before the completion of the voltage ramp (Tb), CKE must be held LOW. DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS# voltage levels must be between V SSQ and V DDQ during voltage ramp to avoid latchup. CK, CK#, CS#, and CA input levels must be between V SSCA and V DDCA during voltage ramp to avoid latchup. The following conditions apply for voltage ramp: * Ta is the point when any power supply first reaches 300mV. * Noted conditions apply between Ta and power-down (controlled or uncontrolled). * Tb is the point at which all supply and reference voltages are within their defined operating ranges. * Power ramp duration tINIT0 (Tb - Ta) must not exceed 20ms. * For supply and reference voltage operating conditions, see the Recommended DC Operating Conditions table. * The voltage difference between any of V SS, V SSQ, and V SSCA pins must not exceed 100mV. Voltage Ramp Completion After Ta is reached: * * * * VDD1 must be greater than V DD2 - 200mV VDD1 and V DD2 must be greater than V DDCA - 200mV VDD1 and V DD2 must be greater than V DDQ - 200mV VREF must always be less than all other supply voltages Beginning at Tb, CKE must remain LOW for at least tINIT1 = 100ns, after which CKE can be asserted HIGH. The clock must be stable at least tINIT2 = 5 x tCK prior to the first CKE LOW-to-HIGH transition (Tc). CKE, CS#, and CA inputs must observe setup and hold requirements (tIS, tIH) with respect to the first rising clock edge (and to subsequent falling and rising edges). If any MRRs are issued, the clock period must be within the range defined for tCKb (18ns to 100ns). MRWs can be issued at normal clock frequencies as long as all AC timings are met. Some AC parameters (for example, tDQSCK) could have relaxed timings (such as tDQSCKb) before the system is appropriately configured. While keeping CKE HIGH, NOP commands must be issued for at least tINIT3 = 200s (Td). 2. RESET Command After tINIT3 is satisfied, the MRW RESET command must be issued (Td). An optional PRECHARGE ALL command can be issued prior to the MRW RESET command. Wait at least tINIT4 while keeping CKE asserted and issuing NOP commands. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 40 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Up 3. MRRs and Device Auto Initialization (DAI) Polling After tINIT4 is satisfied (Te), only MRR commands and power-down entry/exit commands are supported. After Te, CKE can go LOW in alignment with power-down entry and exit specifications (see Power-Down (page 94)). The MRR command can be used to poll the DAI bit, which indicates when device auto initialization is complete; otherwise, the controller must wait a minimum of tINIT5, or until the DAI bit is set, before proceeding. Because the memory output buffers are not properly configured by Te, some AC parameters must use relaxed timing specifications before the system is appropriately configured. After the DAI bit (MR0, DAI) is set to zero by the memory device (DAI complete), the device is in the idle state (Tf). DAI status can be determined by issuing the MRR command to MR0. The device sets the DAI bit no later than tINIT5 after the RESET command. The controller must wait at least tINIT5 or until the DAI bit is set before proceeding. 4. ZQ Calibration After tINIT5 (Tf), the MRW initialization calibration (ZQ calibration) command can be issued to the memory (MR10). This command is used to calibrate output impedance over process, voltage, and temperature. In systems where more than one Mobile LPDDR2 device exists on the same bus, the controller must not overlap MRW ZQ calibration commands. The device is ready for normal operation after tZQINIT. 5. Normal Operation After (Tg), MRW commands must be used to properly configure the memory (output buffer drive strength, latencies, etc.). Specifically, MR1, MR2, and MR3 must be set to configure the memory for the target frequency and memory configuration. After the initialization sequence is complete, the device is ready for any valid command. After Tg, the clock frequency can be changed using the procedure described in Input Clock Frequency Changes and Clock Stop with CKE HIGH (page 103). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 41 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Off Figure 26: Voltage Ramp and Initialization Sequence Ta Tb Tc Td Te Tf Tg tINIT2 CK/CK# tINIT0 Supplies tINIT1 tINIT3 CKE tINIT4 tISCKE CA RESET tINIT5 MRR tZQINIT MRW ZQ_CAL Valid RTT DQ Note: 1. High-Z on the CA bus indicates valid NOP. Table 8: Initialization Timing Parameters Value Parameter Min Max Unit tINIT0 Comment - 20 ms Maximum voltage ramp time tINIT1 100 - ns Minimum CKE LOW time after completion of voltage ramp tINIT2 5 - tCK Minimum stable clock before first CKE HIGH tINIT3 200 - s Minimum idle time after first CKE assertion tINIT4 1 - s Minimum idle time after RESET command tINIT5 - 10 s Maximum duration of device auto initialization tZQINIT 1 - s ZQ initial calibration (S4 devices only) tCKb 18 100 ns Clock cycle time during boot Initialization After RESET (Without Voltage Ramp) If the RESET command is issued before or after the power-up initialization sequence, the reinitialization procedure must begin at Td. Power-Off While powering off, CKE must be held LOW (0.2 x V DDCA); all other inputs must be between V ILmin and V IHmax. The device outputs remain at High-Z while CKE is held LOW. DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS# voltage levels must be between V SSQ and V DDQ during the power-off sequence to avoid latchup. CK, CK#, CS#, and CA input levels must be between V SSCA and V DDCA during the power-off sequence to avoid latchup. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 42 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Tx is the point where any power supply drops below the minimum value specified in the Recommended DC Operating Conditions table. Tz is the point where all power supplies are below 300mV. After Tz, the device is powered off. Required Power Supply Conditions Between Tx and Tz: * * * * VDD1 must be greater than V DD2 - 200mV VDD1 must be greater than V DDCA - 200mV VDD1 must be greater than V DDQ - 200mV VREF must always be less than all other supply voltages The voltage difference between V SS, V SSQ, and V SSCA must not exceed 100mV. For supply and reference voltage operating conditions, see Recommended DC Operating Conditions table. Uncontrolled Power-Off When an uncontrolled power-off occurs, the following conditions must be met: * At Tx, when the power supply drops below the minimum values specified in the Recommended DC Operating Conditions table, all power supplies must be turned off and all power-supply current capacity must be at zero, except for any static charge remaining in the system. * After Tz (the point at which all power supplies first reach 300mV), the device must power off. The time between Tx and Tz must not exceed tPOFF. During this period, the relative voltage between power supplies is uncontrolled. V DD1 and V DD2 must decrease with a slope lower than 0.5 V/s between Tx and Tz. An uncontrolled power-off sequence can occur a maximum of 400 times over the life of the device. Table 9: Power-Off Timing Parameter Maximum power-off ramp time Symbol Min Max Unit tPOFF - 2 sec Mode Register Definition LPDDR2 devices contain a set of mode registers used for programming device operating parameters, reading device information and status, and for initiating special operations such as DQ calibration, ZQ calibration, and device reset. Mode Register Assignments and Definitions The MRR command is used to read from a register. The MRW command is used to write to a register. An "R" in the access column of the mode register assignment table indicates read-only; a "W" indicates write-only; "R/W" indicates read or write capable or enabled. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 43 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 10: Mode Register Assignments Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions MR# MA[7:0] Function Access OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 RZQI OP2 OP1 OP0 DNVI DI DAI Link 0 00h Device info R RFU 1 01h Device feature 1 W nWR (for AP) 2 02h Device feature 2 W RFU RL and WL go to MR2 3 03h I/O config-1 W RFU DS go to MR3 4 04h SDRAM refresh rate R 5 05h Basic config-1 R LPDDR2 Manufacturer ID go to MR5 6 06h Basic config-2 R Revision ID1 go to MR6 7 07h Basic config-3 R Revision ID2 go to MR7 8 08h Basic config-4 R 9 09h Test mode W Vendor-specific test mode WC BT BL RFU TUF I/O width go to MR1 Refresh rate Density go to MR0 Type go to MR4 go to MR8 go to MR9 10 0Ah I/O calibration W Calibration code go to MR10 11-15 0Bh 0Fh Reserved - RFU go to MR11 16 10h PASR_Bank W Bank mask go to MR16 17 11h PASR_Seg W Segment mask go to MR17 Reserved - RFU go to MR18 18-19 12h-13h 20-31 14h-1Fh 32 20h DQ calibration pattern A 33-39 21h-27h Do not use 40 28h DQ calibration pattern B 41-47 29h-2Fh Do not use 48-62 30h-3Eh Reserved - RFU go to MR48 63 3Fh RESET W X go to MR63 64-126 40h-7Eh Reserved - RFU 127 7Fh Do not use 128-190 80h-BEh 191 BFh 192-254 C0h-FEh 255 FFh Reserved for NVM R MR20-MR30 See Table 47 (page 90). go to MR33 R See Table 47 (page 90). go to MR64 go to MR127 RVU Do not use go to MR128 go to MR191 RVU Reserved for vendor use Do not use PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN go to MR40 go to MR41 Reserved for vendor use Notes: go to MR32 go to MR192 go to MR255 1. RFU bits must be set to 0 during MRW. 2. RFU bits must be read as 0 during MRR. 3. For READs to a write-only or RFU register, DQS will be toggled and undefined data is returned. 4. RFU mode registers must not be written. 5. WRITEs to read-only registers must have no impact on the functionality of the device. 44 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 11: MR0 Device Information (MA[7:0] = 00h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 RFU OP3 RZQI OP2 OP1 OP0 DNVI DI DAI Table 12: MR0 Op-Code Bit Definitions Notes 1-4 apply to all parameters and conditions Register Information Tag Type Device auto initialization status Device information DAI Read-only OP Definition OP0 0b: DAI complete 1b: DAI in progress DI Read-only OP1 0b 1b: NVM Data not valid information DNVI Read-only OP2 Built-in self test for RZQ information RZQI Read-only OP[4:3] 0b: DNVI not supported 00b: RZQ self test not supported 01b: ZQ pin might be connected to VDDCA or left floating 10b: ZQ pin might be shorted to ground 11b: ZQ pin self test complete; no error condition detected Notes: 1. If RZQI is supported, it will be set upon completion of the MRW ZQ initialization calibration. 2. If ZQ is connected to VDDCA to set default calibration, OP[4:3] must be set to 01. If ZQ is not connected to VDDCA, either OP[4:3] = 01 or OP[4:3] = 10 could indicate a ZQ-pin assembly error. It is recommended that the assembly error be corrected. 3. In the case of a possible assembly error (either OP[4:3] = 01 or OP[4:3] = 10, as defined above), the device will default to factory trim settings for RON and will ignore ZQ calibration commands. In either case, the system might not function as intended. 4. If a ZQ self test returns a value of 11b, this indicates that the device has detected a resistor connection to the ZQ pin. Note that this result cannot be used to validate the ZQ resistor value, nor does it indicate that the ZQ resistor tolerance meets the specified limits (240 ohms 1%). Table 13: MR1 Device Feature 1 (MA[7:0] = 01h) OP7 OP6 OP5 nWR (for AP) OP4 OP3 WC BT OP2 OP1 OP0 BL Table 14: MR1 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature BL = burst length Type OP Write-only OP[2:0] Definition Notes 010b: BL4 (default) 011b: BL8 100b: BL16 All others: Reserved PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 45 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 14: MR1 Op-Code Bit Definitions (Continued) Feature BT = burst type Type OP Definition Write-only OP3 0b: Sequential (default) Notes 1b: Interleaved WC = wrap control Write-only OP4 0b: Wrap (default) nWR = number of tWR clock cycles Write-only OP[7:5] 1b: No wrap 001b: nWR = 3 (default) 1 010b: nWR = 4 011b: nWR = 5 100b: nWR = 6 101b: nWR = 7 110b: nWR = 8 All others: Reserved Note: 1. The programmed value in nWR register is the number of clock cycles that determines when to start internal precharge operation for a WRITE burst with AP enabled. It is determined by RU (tWR/tCK). Table 15: Burst Sequence by Burst Length (BL), Burst Type (BT), and Wrap Control (WC) Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions Burst Cycle Number and Burst Address Sequence BL BT 4 Any 8 C3 C2 C1 C0 WC Wrap 1 2 3 4 3 1 8 X 0b 0b X 1b 0b Any X X X 0b No wrap y Seq X 0b 0b 0b Wrap 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 0b 1b 0b 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 X 1b 0b 0b 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 X 1b 1b 0b 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 X 0b 0b 0b 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X 0b 1b 0b 2 3 0 1 6 7 4 5 X 1b 0b 0b 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 X 1b 1b 0b 6 7 4 5 2 3 0 1 X X X 0b PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 2 0 7 X Any 1 3 6 X Int 0 2 5 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 y+ y+ y+ 1 2 3 No wrap Illegal (not supported) 46 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 15: Burst Sequence by Burst Length (BL), Burst Type (BT), and Wrap Control (WC) (Continued) Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions Burst Cycle Number and Burst Address Sequence BL BT C3 C2 C1 C0 WC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 Seq 0b 0b 0b 0b Wrap 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0b 0b 1b 0b 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 0b 1b 0b 0b 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 0b 1b 1b 0b 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 1b 0b 0b 0b 8 9 A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1b 0b 1b 0b A B C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1b 1b 0b 0b C D E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B 1b 1b 1b 0b E F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D Int X X X 0b Any X X X 0b Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Illegal (not supported) No wrap Illegal (not supported) C0 input is not present on CA bus. It is implied zero. For BL = 4, the burst address represents C[1:0]. For BL = 8, the burst address represents C[2:0]. For BL = 16, the burst address represents C[3:0]. For no-wrap, BL4, the burst must not cross the page boundary or the sub-page boundary. The variable y can start at any address with C0 equal to 0, but must not start at any address shown in the following table. Table 16: No-Wrap Restrictions Width 64Mb 128Mb/256Mb 512Mb/1Gb/2Gb 4Gb/8Gb Cannot cross full-page boundary x16 FE, FF, 00, 01 1FE, 1FF, 000, 001 3FE, 3FF, 000, 001 7FE, 7FF, 000, 001 x32 7E, 7F, 00, 01 FE, FF, 00, 01 1FE, 1FF, 000, 001 3FE, 3FF, 000, 001 x16 7E, 7F, 80, 81 0FE, 0FF, 100, 101 1FE, 1FF, 200, 201 3FE, 3FF, 400, 401 x32 None None None None Cannot cross sub-page boundary Note: 1. No-wrap BL = 4 data orders shown are prohibited. Table 17: MR2 Device Feature 2 (MA[7:0] = 02h) OP7 OP6 OP5 RFU PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 RL and WL 47 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 18: MR2 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature RL and WL Type OP Write-only OP[3:0] Definition 0001b: RL3/WL1 (default) 0010b: RL4/WL2 0011b: RL5/WL2 0100b: RL6/WL3 0101b: RL7/WL4 0110b: RL8/WL4 All others: Reserved Table 19: MR3 I/O Configuration 1 (MA[7:0] = 03h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 RFU OP1 OP0 OP1 OP0 DS Table 20: MR3 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature DS Type OP Write-only OP[3:0] Definition 0000b: Reserved 0001b: 34.3 ohm typical 0010b: 40 ohm typical (default) 0011b: 48 ohm typical 0100b: 60 ohm typical 0101b: Reserved 0110b: 80 ohm typical 0111b: 120 ohm typical All others: Reserved Table 21: MR4 Device Temperature (MA[7:0] = 04h) OP7 TUF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN OP6 OP5 OP4 RFU 48 OP3 OP2 SDRAM refresh rate Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 22: MR4 Op-Code Bit Definitions Notes 1-8 apply to all parameters and conditions Feature Type OP Definition SDRAM refresh rate Read-only OP[2:0] 000b: SDRAM low temperature operating limit exceeded 001b: 4 x tREFI, 4 x tREFIpb, 4 x tREFW 010b: 2 x tREFI, 2 x tREFIpb, 2 x tREFW 011b: 1 x tREFI, 1 x tREFIpb, 1 x tREFW (85C) 100b: Reserved 101b: 0.25 x tREFI, 0.25 x tREFIpb, 0.25 x tREFW, do not derate SDRAM AC timing 110b: 0.25 x tREFI, 0.25 x tREFIpb, 0.25 x tREFW, derate SDRAM AC timing 111b: SDRAM high temperature operating limit exceeded Temperature update flag (TUF) Read-only OP7 0b: OP[2:0] value has not changed since last read of MR4 1b: OP[2:0] value has changed since last read of MR4 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A MODE REGISTER READ from MR4 will reset OP7 to 0. OP7 is reset to 0 at power-up. If OP2 = 1, the device temperature is greater than 85C. OP7 is set to 1 if OP[2:0] has changed at any time since the last MR4 read. The device might not operate properly when OP[2:0] = 000b or 111b. For specified operating temperature range and maximum operating temperature, refer to the Operating Temperature Range table. 7. LPDDR2 devices must be derated by adding 1.875ns to the following core timing parameters: tRCD, tRC, tRAS, tRP, and tRRD. The tDQSCK parameter must be derated as specified in AC Timing. Prevailing clock frequency specifications and related setup and hold timings remain unchanged. 8. The recommended frequency for reading MR4 is provided in Temperature Sensor (page 87). Notes: Table 23: MR5 Basic Configuration 1 (MA[7:0] = 05h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 OP1 OP0 LPDDR2 Manufacturer ID Table 24: MR5 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature Manufacturer ID Type OP Read-only OP[7:0] Definition 1111 1111b: Micron All others: Reserved Table 25: MR6 Basic Configuration 2 (MA[7:0] = 06h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 Revision ID1 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. MR6 is vendor-specific. 49 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 26: MR6 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature Revision ID1 Type OP Read-only OP[7:0] Definition 0000 0000b: Version A Table 27: MR7 Basic Configuration 3 (MA[7:0] = 07h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 Revision ID2 Table 28: MR7 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature Revision ID2 Note: Type OP Read-only OP[7:0] Definition 0000 0000b: Version A 1. MR7 is vendor-specific. Table 29: MR8 Basic Configuration 4 (MA[7:0] = 08h) OP7 OP6 OP5 I/O width OP4 OP3 OP2 Density OP1 OP0 Type Table 30: MR8 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature Type Type OP Read-only OP[1:0] Definition 00b 01b 10b: NVM 11b: Reserved Density Read-only OP[5:2] 0000b: 64Mb 0001b: 128Mb 0010b: 256Mb 0011b: 512Mb 0100b: 1Gb 0101b: 2Gb 0110b: 4Gb 0111b: 8Gb 1000b: 16Gb 1001b: 32Gb All others: Reserved I/O width Read-only OP[7:6] 00b: x32 01b: x16 10b: x8 11b: not used PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 50 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 31: MR9 Test Mode (MA[7:0] = 09h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 Vendor-specific test mode Table 32: MR10 Calibration (MA[7:0] = 0Ah) OP7 OP6 OP5 S4 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 Calibration code Table 33: MR10 Op-Code Bit Definitions Notes 1-4 apply to all parameters and conditions Feature Type OP Definition Calibration code Write-only OP[7:0] 0xFF: Calibration command after initialization 0xAB: Long calibration 0x56: Short calibration 0xC3: ZQRESET All others: Reserved Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Host processor must not write MR10 with reserved values. The device ignores calibration commands when a reserved value is written into MR10. See AC timing table for the calibration latency. If ZQ is connected to VSSCA through RZQ, either the ZQ calibration function (see MRW ZQ Calibration Commands (page 92)) or default calibration (through the ZQRESET command) is supported. If ZQ is connected to VDDCA, the device operates with default calibration, and ZQ calibration commands are ignored. In both cases, the ZQ connection must not change after power is supplied to the device. Table 34: MR[11:15] Reserved (MA[7:0] = 0Bh-0Fh) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 OP2 OP1 OP0 Reserved Table 35: MR16 PASR Bank Mask (MA[7:0] = 010h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 Bank mask (4-bank or 8-bank) Table 36: MR16 Op-Code Bit Definitions Feature Bank[7:0] mask Type OP Write-only OP[7:0] Definition 0b: refresh enable to the bank = unmasked (default) 1b: refresh blocked = masked Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. For 4-bank devices, only OP[3:0] are used. 51 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 37: MR17 PASR Segment Mask (MA[7:0] = 011h) OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 Segment mask 1. This table applies for 1Gb to 8Gb devices only. Note: Table 38: MR17 PASR Segment Mask Definitions Feature Segment[7:0] mask Type OP Write-only OP[7:0] Definition 0b: refresh enable to the segment: = unmasked (default) 1b: refresh blocked: = masked Table 39: MR17 PASR Row Address Ranges in Masked Segments Note: 1Gb 2Gb, 4Gb 8Gb R[12:10] R[13:11] R[14:12] Segment OP Segment Mask 0 0 XXXXXXX1 000b 1 1 XXXXXX1X 001b 2 2 XXXXX1XX 010b 3 3 XXXX1XXX 011b 4 4 XXX1XXXX 100b 5 5 XX1XXXXX 101b 6 6 X1XXXXXX 110b 7 7 1XXXXXXX 111b 1. X is "Don't Care" for the designated segment. Table 40: Reserved Mode Registers Mode Register MR[18:19] MA Address MA[7:0] Restriction 12h-13h RFU MR[20:31] 14h-1Fh NVM1 MR[33:39] 21h-27h DNU1 MR[41:47] 29h-2Fh MR[48:62] 30h-3Eh RFU MR[64:126] 40h-7Eh RFU MR127 7Fh DNU MR[128:190] 80h-BEh RVU1 MR191 BFh DNU MR[192:254] C0h-FEh RVU MR255 FFh DNU Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 Reserved 1. NVM = nonvolatile memory use only; DNU = Do not use; RVU = Reserved for vendor use. 52 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Mode Register Definition Table 41: MR63 RESET (MA[7:0] = 3Fh) - MRW Only OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1 OP0 X Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. For additional information on MRW RESET see MODE REGISTER WRITE Command (page 91). 53 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 ACTIVATE Command ACTIVATE Command The ACTIVATE command is issued by holding CS# LOW, CA0 LOW, and CA1 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. The bank addresses BA[2:0] are used to select the desired bank. Row addresses are used to determine which row to activate in the selected bank. The ACTIVATE command must be applied before any READ or WRITE operation can be executed. The device can accept a READ or WRITE command at tRCD after the ACTIVATE command is issued. After a bank has been activated, it must be precharged before another ACTIVATE command can be applied to the same bank. The bank active and precharge times are defined as tRAS and tRP, respectively. The minimum time interval between successive ACTIVATE commands to the same bank is determined by the RAS cycle time of the device (tRC). The minimum time interval between ACTIVATE commands to different banks is tRRD. Figure 27: ACTIVATE Command T0 T1 T2 T3 Tn Tn+1 Tn+2 Tn+3 CK# CK CA[9:0] Bankn Row addr row addr Bankm Row addr Bankn row addr col addr Col addr Bankn Row addr row addr Bankn tRRD tRCD tRP tRAS tRC CMD ACTIVATE NOP Notes: ACTIVATE READ PRECHARGE NOP NOP ACTIVATE 1. tRCD = 3, tRP = 3, tRRD = 2. 2. A PRECHARGE ALL command uses tRPab timing, and a single-bank PRECHARGE command uses tRPpb timing. In this figure, tRP is used to denote either an all-bank PRECHARGE or a single-bank PRECHARGE. 8-Bank Device Operation Two rules regarding 8-bank device operation must be observed. One rule restricts the number of sequential ACTIVATE commands that can be issued; the second provides additional RAS precharge time for a PRECHARGE ALL command. The 8-Bank Device Sequential Bank Activation Restriction: No more than four banks can be activated (or refreshed, in the case of REFpb) in a rolling tFAW window. To convert to clocks, divide tFAW[ns] by tCK[ns], and round up to the next integer value. For example, if RU(tFAW/tCK) is 10 clocks, and an ACTIVATE command is issued in clock n, no more than three further ACTIVATE commands can be issued at or between clock n + 1 and n + 9. REFpb also counts as bank activation for purposes of tFAW. The 8-Bank Device PRECHARGE ALL Provision: tRP for a PRECHARGE ALL command must equal tRPab, which is greater than tRPpb. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 54 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Read and Write Access Modes Figure 28: tFAW Timing (8-Bank Devices) Tn Tn+ Tm Tm+ Tx Tx+ Ty Ty + 1 Ty + 2 Tz Tz + 1 Tz + 2 CK# CK CA[9:0] Bank Bank A A Bank Bank B B tRRD CMD ACTIVATE Bank Bank C C tRRD ACTIVATE NOP NOP Bank Bank D D Bank Bank E E tRRD ACTIVATE NOP ACTIVATE NOP NOP NOP ACTIVATE NOP tFAW Note: 1. Exclusively for 8-bank devices. Read and Write Access Modes After a bank is activated, a READ or WRITE command can be issued with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, and CA1 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. CA2 must also be defined at this time to determine whether the access cycle is a READ operation (CA2 HIGH) or a WRITE operation (CA2 LOW). A single READ or WRITE command initiates a burst READ or burst WRITE operation on successive clock cycles. A new burst access must not interrupt the previous 4-bit burst operation when BL = 4. When BL = 8 or BL = 16, READs can be interrupted by READs and WRITEs can be interrupted by WRITEs, provided that the interrupt occurs on a 4-bit boundary and that tCCD is met. Burst READ Command The burst READ command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, CA1 LOW, and CA2 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. The command address bus inputs, CA5r-CA6r and CA1f-CA9f, determine the starting column address for the burst. The read latency (RL) is defined from the rising edge of the clock on which the READ command is issued to the rising edge of the clock from which the tDQSCK delay is measured. The first valid data is available RL x tCK + tDQSCK + tDQSQ after the rising edge of the clock when the READ command is issued. The data strobe output is driven LOW tRPRE before the first valid rising strobe edge. The first bit of the burst is synchronized with the first rising edge of the data strobe. Each subsequent data-out appears on each DQ pin, edgealigned with the data strobe. The RL is programmed in the mode registers. Pin input timings for the data strobe are measured relative to the crosspoint of DQS and its complement, DQS#. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 55 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 29: READ Output Timing - tDQSCK (MAX) RL - 1 RL RL + BL/ 2 tCH CK# CK tCL tHZ(DQS) tDQSCKmax tLZ(DQS) tRPRE tRPST DQS# DQS tQH tQH tDQSQmax DOUT DQ tDQSQmax DOUT DOUT tLZ(DQ) DOUT tHZ(DQ) Transitioning data Notes: 1. tDQSCK can span multiple clock periods. 2. An effective burst length of 4 is shown. Figure 30: READ Output Timing - tDQSCK (MIN) RL - 1 RL RL + BL/2 tCH CK# CK tCL tHZ(DQS) tDQSCKmin tLZ(DQS) tRPRE tRPST DQS# DQS tQH tQH tDQSQmax tDQSQmax DOUT DQ DOUT DOUT DOUT tHZ(DQ) tLZ(DQ) Transitioning data Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. An effective burst length of 4 is shown. 56 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 31: Burst READ - RL = 5, BL = 4, tDQSCK > tCK T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA[9:0] CMD Bank n col addr Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCK DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 Transitioning data Figure 32: Burst READ - RL = 3, BL = 8, tDQSCK < tCK T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] CMD Bank n col addr Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCK DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A4 DOUT A5 DOUT A6 DOUT A7 Transitioning data PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 57 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 33: tDQSCKDL Timing Tn Tn + 1 Tn + 2 Tn + 3 Tn + 4 Tn + 5 Tn + 6 Tn + 7 Tn + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bank n col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKn DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 32ms maximum... 1 Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tm + 4 Tm + 5 Tm + 6 Tm + 7 Tm + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bank n col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKm DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 ...32ms maximum Transitioning data 1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. tDQSCKDL = (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm). 2. tDQSCKDL (MAX) is defined as the maximum of ABS (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm) for any (tDQSCKn, tDQSCKm) pair within any 32ms rolling window. 58 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 34: tDQSCKDM Timing Tn Tn + 1 Tn + 2 Tn + 3 Tn + 4 Tn + 5 Tn + 6 Tn + 7 Tn + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bank n col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKn DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 1.6s maximum... 1 Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tm + 4 Tm + 5 Tm + 6 Tm + 7 Tm + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bankn col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKm DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 ...1.6s maximum Transitioning data 1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. tDQSCKDM = (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm). 2. tDQSCKDM (MAX) is defined as the maximum of ABS (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm) for any (tDQSCKn, tDQSCKm) pair within any 1.6s rolling window. 59 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 35: tDQSCKDS Timing Tn Tn + 1 Tn + 2 Tn + 3 Tn + 4 Tn + 5 Tn + 6 Tn + 7 Tn + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bank n col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKn DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A4 160ns maximum... 1 Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tm + 4 Tm + 5 Tm + 6 Tm + 7 Tm + 8 CK# CK RL = 5 CA [9:0] Bank n col addr CMD Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCKm DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 ...160ns maximum Transitioning data 1 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. tDQSCKDS = (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm). 2. tDQSCKDS (MAX) is defined as the maximum of ABS (tDQSCKn - tDQSCKm) for any (tDQSCKn, tDQSCKm) pair for READs within a consecutive burst, within any 160ns rolling window. 60 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst READ Command Figure 36: Burst READ Followed by Burst WRITE - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] CMD Bank n col addr WL = 1 Bank n col addr Col addr READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSCK Col addr NOP WRITE NOP tDQSSmin BL/2 DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DIN A0 DIN A1 D Transitioning data The minimum time from the burst READ command to the burst WRITE command is defined by the read latency (RL) and the burst length (BL). Minimum READ-to-WRITE latency is RL + RU(tDQSCK(MAX)/tCK) + BL/2 + 1 - WL clock cycles. Note that if a READ burst is truncated with a burst TERMINATE (BST) command, the effective burst length of the truncated READ burst should be used for BL when calculating the minimum READ-to-WRITE delay. Figure 37: Seamless Burst READ - RL = 3, BL = 4, tCCD = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] Bankn Col addr a col addr a tCCD CMD READ Bankn Col addr b col addr b =2 NOP READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT B0 DOUT B1 DOUT B2 DOUT B3 Transitioning data A seamless burst READ operation is supported by enabling a READ command at every other clock cycle for BL = 4 operation, every fourth clock cycle for BL = 8 operation, and PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 61 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst WRITE Command every eighth clock cycle for BL = 16 operation. This operation is supported as long as the banks are activated, whether the accesses read the same or different banks. READs Interrupted by a READ A burst READ can be interrupted by another READ with a 4-bit burst boundary, provided that tCCD is met. A burst READ can be interrupted by other READs on any subsequent clock, provided that tCCD is met. Figure 38: READ Burst Interrupt Example - RL = 3, BL = 8, tCCD = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] Bank n Col addr a col addr a Bank n Col addr b col addr b tCCD CMD READ =2 NOP READ NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT B0 DOUT B1 DOUT B2 DOUT B3 DOUT B4 DOUT B5 Transitioning data Note: 1. READs can only be interrupted by other READs or the BST command. Burst WRITE Command The burst WRITE command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, CA1 LOW, and CA2 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. The command address bus inputs, CA5r-CA6r and CA1f-CA9f, determine the starting column address for the burst. Write latency (WL) is defined from the rising edge of the clock on which the WRITE command is issued to the rising edge of the clock from which the tDQSS delay is measured. The first valid data must be driven WL x tCK + tDQSS from the rising edge of the clock from which the WRITE command is issued. The data strobe signal (DQS) must be driven LOW tWPRE prior to data input. The burst cycle data bits must be applied to the DQ pins tDS prior to the associated edge of the DQS and held valid until tDH after that edge. Burst data is sampled on successive edges of the DQS until the 4-, 8-, or 16-bit burst length is completed. After a burst WRITE operation, tWR must be satisfied before a PRECHARGE command to the same bank can be issued. Pin input timings are measured relative to the crosspoint of DQS and its complement, DQS#. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 62 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst WRITE Command Figure 39: Data Input (WRITE) Timing tWPRE DQS tDQSH tDQSL VIH(DC) VIH(AC) tWPST DQS# DQS# DQS VIH(AC) DIN DQ VIL(AC) tDS DIN tDH VIL(DC) VIH(AC) tDS VIH(DC) DIN tDH VIL(AC) VIH(DC) tDS DIN tDH VIL(DC) tDS VIH(AC) tDH VIH(DC) DM VIL(AC) VIL(DC) VIL(AC) VIL(DC) Don't Care Figure 40: Burst WRITE - WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 Tx Tx + 1 Ty Ty + 1 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] CMD Bank n col addr Col addr WRITE Case 1: tDQSSmax Bank n Row addr row addr Bank n NOP NOP tDQSSmax NOP tDSS NOP tDSS NOP PRECHARGE ACTIVATE NOP Completion of burst WRITE DQS# DQS tWR DQ Case 2: tDQSSmin DQS# DQS DIN A0 tDQSSmin DIN A1 tDSH DIN A2 DIN A3 tDSH tRP tWR DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 Transitioning data PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 63 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Burst WRITE Command Figure 41: Burst WRITE Followed by Burst READ - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 WL = 1 CA[9:0] Bank n Col addr b col addr b Bank m Col addr a col addr a tWTR CMD WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP READ NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 Transitioning data Notes: 1. The minimum number of clock cycles from the burst WRITE command to the burst READ command for any bank is [WL + 1 + BL/2 + RU(tWTR/tCK)]. 2. tWTR starts at the rising edge of the clock after the last valid input data. 3. If a WRITE burst is truncated with a BST command, the effective burst length of the truncated WRITE burst should be used as BL to calculate the minimum WRITE-to-READ delay. Figure 42: Seamless Burst WRITE - WL = 1, BL = 4, tCCD = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] Bank m Col addr a col addr a Bank n Col addr b col addr b tCCD CMD WRITE =2 NOP WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 DIN B0 DIN B1 DIN B2 DIN B3 Transitioning data Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. The seamless burst WRITE operation is supported by enabling a WRITE command every other clock for BL = 4 operation, every four clocks for BL = 8 operation, or every eight clocks for BL = 16 operation. This operation is supported for any activated bank. 64 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 BURST TERMINATE Command WRITEs Interrupted by a WRITE A burst WRITE can only be interrupted by another WRITE with a 4-bit burst boundary, provided that tCCD (MIN) is met. A WRITE burst interrupt can occur on even clock cycles after the initial WRITE command, provided that tCCD (MIN) is met. Figure 43: WRITE Burst Interrupt Timing - WL = 1, BL = 8, tCCD = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] Bank m Col addr a col addr a Bank n Col addr b col addr b tCCD CMD WRITE =2 NOP WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 DIN B0 DIN B1 DIN B2 DIN B3 DIN B4 DIN B5 DIN B6 DIN B7 Transitioning data Notes: 1. WRITEs can only be interrupted by other WRITEs or the BST command. 2. The effective burst length of the first WRITE equals two times the number of clock cycles between the first WRITE and the interrupting WRITE. BURST TERMINATE Command The BURST TERMINATE (BST) command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, CA1 HIGH, CA2 LOW, and CA3 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. A BST command can only be issued to terminate an active READ or WRITE burst. Therefore, a BST command can only be issued up to and including BL/2 - 1 clock cycles after a READ or WRITE command. The effective burst length of a READ or WRITE command truncated by a BST command is as follows: * Effective burst length = 2 x (number of clock cycles from the READ or WRITE command to the BST command). * If a READ or WRITE burst is truncated with a BST command, the effective burst length of the truncated burst should be used for BL when calculating the minimum READto-WRITE or WRITE-to-READ delay. * The BST command only affects the most recent READ or WRITE command. The BST command truncates an ongoing READ burst RL x tCK + tDQSCK + tDQSQ after the rising edge of the clock where the BST command is issued. The BST command truncates an ongoing WRITE burst WL x tCK + tDQSS after the rising edge of the clock where the BST command is issued. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 65 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 BURST TERMINATE Command * The 4-bit prefetch architecture enables BST command assertion on even clock cycles following a WRITE or READ command. The effective burst length of a READ or WRITE command truncated by a BST command is thus an integer multiple of four. Figure 44: Burst WRITE Truncated by BST - WL = 1, BL = 16 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] CMD Bank m col addr a Col addr a WRITE NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP BST NOP NOP WL x tCK + tDQSS DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 DIN A4 DIN A5 DIN A6 DIN A7 BST prohibited Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Transitioning data 1. The BST command truncates an ongoing WRITE burst WL x tCK + tDQSS after the rising edge of the clock where the BST command is issued. 2. BST can only be issued an even number of clock cycles after the WRITE command. 3. Additional BST commands are not supported after T4 and must not be issued until after the next READ or WRITE command. 66 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Write Data Mask Figure 45: Burst READ Truncated by BST - RL = 3, BL = 16 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] CMD Bank n Col addr a col addr a READ NOP NOP NOP NOP BST NOP NOP NOP RL x tCK + tDQSCK + tDQSQ DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A4 DOUT A5 DOUT A6 DOUT A7 BST prohibited Transitioning data 1. The BST command truncates an ongoing READ burst (RL x tCK + tDQSCK + tDQSQ) after the rising edge of the clock where the BST command is issued. 2. BST can only be issued an even number of clock cycles after the READ command. 3. Additional BST commands are not supported after T4 and must not be issued until after the next READ or WRITE command. Notes: Write Data Mask On LPDDR2 devices, one write data mask (DM) pin for each data byte (DQ) is supported, consistent with the implementation on LPDDR SDRAM. Each DM can mask its respective DQ for any given cycle of the burst. Data mask timings match data bit timing, but are inputs only. Internal data mask loading is identical to data bit loading to ensure matched system timing. Figure 46: Data Mask Timing DQS DQS# DQ VIH(AC) tDS tDH VIH(DC) VIH(AC) tDS tDH VIH(DC) DM VIL(AC) VIL(DC) VIL(AC) VIL(DC) Don't Care PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 67 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Figure 47: Write Data Mask - Second Data Bit Masked CK# CK tWR tWTR WL = 2 CMD WRITE Case 1: t DQSSmin tDQSSmin DQS DQS# DOUT 0 DOUT 1 DOUT 2 DOUT 3 DQ DM Case 2: t DQSSmax tDQSSmax DQS# DQS DOUT 0 DOUT 1 DOUT 2 DOUT 3 DQ DM Don't Care Note: 1. For the data mask function, WL = 2, BL = 4 is shown; the second data bit is masked. PRECHARGE Command The PRECHARGE command is used to precharge or close a bank that has been activated. The PRECHARGE command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, CA1 HIGH, CA2 LOW, and CA3 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. The PRECHARGE command can be used to precharge each bank independently or all banks simultaneously. For 4-bank devices, the AB flag and bank address bits BA0 and BA1 are used to determine which bank(s) to precharge. For 8-bank devices, the AB flag and the bank address bits BA0, BA1, and BA2 are used to determine which bank(s) to precharge. The precharged bank(s) will be available for subsequent row access tRPab after an all bank PRECHARGE command is issued, or tRPpb after a single-bank PRECHARGE command is issued. To ensure that 8-bank devices can meet the instantaneous current demand required to operate, the row precharge time (tRP) for an all bank PRECHARGE in 8-bank devices (tRPab) will be longer than the row precharge time for a single-bank PRECHARGE (tRPpb). For 4-bank devices, tRPab is equal to tRPpb. ACTIVATE to PRECHARGE timing is shown in ACTIVATE Command (page 54). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 68 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Table 42: Bank Selection for PRECHARGE by Address Bits AB (CA4r) BA2 (CA9r) BA1 (CA8r) BA0 (CA7r) 0 0 0 0 Bank 0 only Bank 0 only 0 0 0 1 Bank 1 only Bank 1 only 0 0 1 0 Bank 2 only Bank 2 only 0 0 1 1 Bank 3 only Bank 3 only 0 1 0 0 Bank 0 only Bank 4 only 0 1 0 1 Bank 1 only Bank 5 only 0 1 1 0 Bank 2 only Bank 6 only 1 1 1 Bank 3 only Bank 7 only All banks All banks 0 1 Precharged Bank(s) Precharged Bank(s) 4-Bank Device 8-Bank Device Don't Care Don't Care Don't Care READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE For the earliest possible precharge, the PRECHARGE command can be issued BL/2 clock cycles after a READ command. A new bank ACTIVATE command can be issued to the same bank after the row precharge time (tRP) has elapsed. A PRECHARGE command cannot be issued until after tRAS is satisfied. The minimum READ-to-PRECHARGE time (tRTP) must also satisfy a minimum analog time from the rising clock edge that initiates the last 4-bit prefetch of a READ command. tRTP begins BL/2 - 2 clock cycles after the READ command. If the burst is truncated by a BST command, the effective BL value is used to calculate when tRTP begins. Figure 48: READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - RL = 3, BL = 8, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 BL/2 CA[9:0] Bank m col addr a Col addr a Bank m row addr Bank m tRP tRTP CMD READ NOP NOP NOP Row addr PRECHARGE NOP NOP ACTIVATE NOP DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT A4 DOUT A5 DOUT A6 DOUT A7 Transitioning data PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 69 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Figure 49: READ Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - RL = 3, BL = 4, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 3 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK BL/2 RL = 3 CA[9:0] Bank m col addr a Col addr a tRTP CMD READ Bank m row addr Bank m NOP Row addr tRP =3 NOP PRECHARGE NOP NOP ACTIVATE NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 Transitioning data WRITE Burst Followed by PRECHARGE For WRITE cycles, a WRITE recovery time ( tWR) must be provided before a PRECHARGE command can be issued. tWR delay is referenced from the completion of the burst WRITE. The PRECHARGE command must not be issued prior to the tWR delay. For WRITE-to-PRECHARGE timings see Table 43 (page 73). These devices write data to the array in prefetch quadruples (prefetch = 4). An internal WRITE operation can only begin after a prefetch group has been completely latched. The minimum WRITE-to-PRECHARGE time for commands to the same bank is WL + BL/2 + 1 + RU(tWR/tCK) clock cycles. For untruncated bursts, BL is the value set in the mode register. For truncated bursts, BL is the effective burst length. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 70 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Figure 50: WRITE Burst Followed by PRECHARGE - WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 Tx Tx + 1 Ty Ty + 1 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] Bank n col addr Col addr WRITE Case 1: t DQSSmax NOP NOP NOP NOP tDQSSmax Row addr tRP tWR CMD Bank n row addr Bank n PRECHARGE NOP ACTIVATE NOP Completion of burst WRITE DQS# DQS DQ Case 2: t DQSSmin DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 tDQSSmin DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 Transitioning data Auto Precharge Before a new row can be opened in an active bank, the active bank must be precharged using either the PRECHARGE command or the auto precharge function. When a READ or WRITE command is issued to the device, the auto precharge bit (AP) can be set to enable the active bank to automatically begin precharge at the earliest possible moment during the burst READ or WRITE cycle. If AP is LOW when the READ or WRITE command is issued, then normal READ or WRITE burst operation is executed and the bank remains active at the completion of the burst. If AP is HIGH when the READ or WRITE command is issued, the auto precharge function is engaged. This feature enables the PRECHARGE operation to be partially or completely hidden during burst READ cycles (dependent upon READ or WRITE latency), thus improving system performance for random data access. READ Burst with Auto Precharge If AP (CA0f) is HIGH when a READ command is issued, the READ with auto precharge function is engaged. These devices start an auto precharge on the rising edge of the clock BL/2 or BL/2 - 2 + RU(tRTP/tCK) clock cycles later than the READ with auto precharge command, whichever is greater. For auto precharge calculations see Table 43 (page 73). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 71 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Following an auto precharge operation, an ACTIVATE command can be issued to the same bank if the following two conditions are satisfied simultaneously: * The RAS precharge time (tRP) has been satisfied from the clock at which the auto precharge begins. * The RAS cycle time (tRC) from the previous bank activation has been satisfied. Figure 51: READ Burst with Auto Precharge - RL = 3, BL = 4, RU(tRTP(MIN)/tCK) = 2 T0 CK# CK T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 BL/2 RL = 3 CA[9:0] Bankm Col addr a col addr a Bankm Row addr row addr tRPpb tRTP CMD READ w/AP NOP NOP NOP NOP ACTIVATE NOP NOP NOP DQS# DQS DQ DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 Transitioning data WRITE Burst with Auto Precharge If AP (CA0f) is HIGH when a WRITE command is issued, the WRITE with auto precharge function is engaged. The device starts an auto precharge at the clock rising edge tWR cycles after the completion of the burst WRITE. Following a WRITE with auto precharge, an ACTIVATE command can be issued to the same bank if the following two conditions are met: * The RAS precharge time (tRP) has been satisfied from the clock at which the auto precharge begins. * The RAS cycle time (tRC) from the previous bank activation has been satisfied. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 72 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 PRECHARGE Command Figure 52: WRITE Burst with Auto Precharge - WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK WL = 1 CA[9:0] Bankn col addr Bankn Row addr row addr Col addr tWR CMD WRITE NOP NOP NOP tRPpb NOP NOP NOP ACTIVATE NOP DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 Transitioning data Table 43: PRECHARGE and Auto Precharge Clarification From Command READ BST READ w/AP To Command PRECHARGE to same bank as READ Minimum Delay Between Commands BL/2 + MAX(2, RU(tRTP/tCK)) - 2 RU(tRTP/tCK)) -2 Unit Notes CLK 1 CLK 1 1 PRECHARGE ALL BL/2 + MAX(2, PRECHARGE to same bank as READ 1 CLK PRECHARGE ALL 1 CLK 1 PRECHARGE to same bank as READ w/AP BL/2 + MAX(2, RU(tRTP/tCK)) - 2 CLK 1, 2 PRECHARGE ALL BL/2 + MAX(2, RU(tRTP/tCK)) - 2 CLK 1 CLK 1 ACTIVATE to same bank as READ w/AP BL/2 + MAX(2, RU(tRTP/tCK)) -2+ RU(tRPpb/ tCK) WRITE BST WRITE or WRITE w/AP (same bank) Illegal CLK 3 WRITE or WRITE w/AP (different bank) RL + BL/2 + RU(tDQSCKmax/tCK) - WL + 1 CLK 3 READ or READ w/AP (same bank) Illegal CLK 3 READ or READ w/AP (different bank) BL/2 CLK 3 RU(tWR/tCK) PRECHARGE to same bank as WRITE WL + BL/2 + +1 CLK 1 PRECHARGE ALL WL + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK) + 1 CLK 1 PRECHARGE to same bank as WRITE PRECHARGE ALL PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN WL + RU(tWR/tCK) +1 CLK 1 WL + RU(tWR/tCK) +1 CLK 1 73 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Table 43: PRECHARGE and Auto Precharge Clarification (Continued) From Command To Command WRITE w/AP PRECHARGE to same bank as WRITE w/AP Minimum Delay Between Commands WL + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK) + 1 Unit Notes CLK 1, 2 CLK 1 CLK 1 WL + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK) ACTIVATE to same bank as WRITE w/AP WL + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK) WRITE or WRITE w/AP (same bank) Illegal CLK 3 WRITE or WRITE w/AP (different bank) BL/2 CLK 3 READ or READ w/AP (same bank) Illegal CLK 3 CLK 3 PRECHARGE ALL READ or READ w/AP (different bank) PRECHARGE PRECHARGE to same bank as PRECHARGE WL + BL/2 + +1 +1+ RU(tWTR/tCK) +1 RU(tRPpb/tCK) 1 CLK 1 PRECHARGE ALL 1 CLK 1 PRECHARGE PRECHARGE ALL PRECHARGE ALL 1 CLK 1 1 CLK 1 Notes: 1. For a given bank, the PRECHARGE period should be counted from the latest PRECHARGE command--either a one-bank PRECHARGE or PRECHARGE ALL--issued to that bank. The PRECHARGE period is satisfied after tRP, depending on the latest PRECHARGE command issued to that bank. 2. Any command issued during the specified minimum delay time is illegal. 3. After READ with auto precharge, seamless READ operations to different banks are supported. After WRITE with auto precharge, seamless WRITE operations to different banks are supported. READ with auto precharge and WRITE with auto precharge must not be interrupted or truncated. REFRESH Command The REFRESH command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 LOW, CA1 LOW, and CA2 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. Per-bank REFRESH is initiated with CA3 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. All-bank REFRESH is initiated with CA3 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. Per-bank REFRESH is only supported in devices with eight banks. A per-bank REFRESH command (REFpb) performs a per-bank REFRESH operation to the bank scheduled by the bank counter in the memory device. The bank sequence for per-bank REFRESH is fixed to be a sequential round-robin: 0-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-0-1-.... The bank count is synchronized between the controller and the SDRAM by resetting the bank count to zero. Synchronization can occur upon issuing a RESET command or at every exit from self refresh. Bank addressing for the per-bank REFRESH count is the same as established for the single-bank PRECHARGE command (see Table 42 (page 69)). A bank must be idle before it can be refreshed. The controller must track the bank being refreshed by the per-bank REFRESH command. The REFpb command must not be issued to the device until the following conditions have been met: * tRFCab has been satisfied after the prior REFab command * tRFCpb has been satisfied after the prior REFpb command * tRP has been satisfied after the prior PRECHARGE command to that bank PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 74 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command * tRRD has been satisfied after the prior ACTIVATE command (if applicable, for example after activating a row in a different bank than the one affected by the REFpb command) The target bank is inaccessible during per-bank REFRESH cycle time (tRFCpb), however, other banks within the device are accessible and can be addressed during the cycle. During the REFpb operation, any of the banks other than the one being refreshed can be maintained in an active state or accessed by a READ or WRITE command. When the per-bank REFRESH cycle has completed, the affected bank will be in the idle state. After issuing REFpb, the following conditions must be met: * * * * tRFCpb must be satisfied before issuing a REFab command must be satisfied before issuing an ACTIVATE command to the same bank tRRD must be satisfied before issuing an ACTIVATE command to a different bank tRFCpb must be satisfied before issuing another REFpb command tRFCpb An all-bank REFRESH command (REFab) issues a REFRESH command to all banks. All banks must be idle when REFab is issued (for instance, by issuing a PRECHARGE ALL command prior to issuing an all-bank REFRESH command). REFab also synchronizes the bank count between the controller and the SDRAM to zero. The REFab command must not be issued to the device until the following conditions have been met: * tRFCab has been satisfied following the prior REFab command * tRFCpb has been satisfied following the prior REFpb command * tRP has been satisfied following the prior PRECHARGE commands After an all-bank REFRESH cycle has completed, all banks will be idle. After issuing REFab: * tRFCab latency must be satisfied before issuing an ACTIVATE command * tRFCab latency must be satisfied before issuing a REFab or REFpb command Table 44: REFRESH Command Scheduling Separation Requirements Symbol Minimum Delay From tRFCab REFab To Notes REFab ACTIVATE command to any bank REFpb tRFCpb REFpb REFab ACTIVATE command to same bank as REFpb REFpb PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 75 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Table 44: REFRESH Command Scheduling Separation Requirements (Continued) Symbol Minimum Delay From tRRD REFpb To Notes ACTIVATE command to a different bank than REFpb ACTIVATE REFpb 1 ACTIVATE command to a different bank than the prior ACTIVATE command Note: 1. A bank must be in the idle state before it is refreshed, so REFab is prohibited following an ACTIVATE command. REFpb is supported only if it affects a bank that is in the idle state. Mobile LPDDR2 devices provide significant flexibility in scheduling REFRESH commands as long as the required boundary conditions are met (see Figure 57 (page 81)). In the most straightforward implementations, a REFRESH command should be scheduled every tREFI. In this case, self refresh can be entered at any time. Users may choose to deviate from this regular refresh pattern, for instance, to enable a period in which no refresh is required. As an example, using a 1Gb LPDDR2 device, the user can choose to issue a refresh burst of 4096 REFRESH commands at the maximum supported rate (limited by tREFBW), followed by an extended period without issuing any REFRESH commands, until the refresh window is complete. The maximum supported time without REFRESH commands is calculated as follows: tREFW - (R/8) x tREFBW = tREFW - R x 4 x tRFCab. For example, a 1Gb device at T C 85C can be operated without a refresh for up to 32ms - 4096 x 4 x 130ns 30ms. Both the regular and the burst/pause patterns can satisfy refresh requirements if they are repeated in every 32ms window. It is critical to satisfy the refresh requirement in every rolling refresh window during refresh pattern transitions. The supported transition from a burst pattern to a regular distributed pattern is shown in Figure 54 (page 78). If this transition occurs immediately after the burst refresh phase, all rolling tREFW intervals will meet the minimum required number of REFRESH commands. A nonsupported transition is shown in Figure 55 (page 79). In this example, the regular refresh pattern starts after the completion of the pause phase of the burst/pause refresh pattern. For several rolling tREFW intervals, the minimum number of REFRESH commands is not satisfied. Understanding this pattern transition is extremely important, even when only one pattern is employed. In self refresh mode, a regular distributed refresh pattern must be assumed. Micron recommends entering self refresh mode immediately following the burst phase of a burst/pause refresh pattern; upon exiting self refresh, begin with the burst phase (see Figure 56 (page 80)). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 76 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Figure 53: Regular Distributed Refresh Pattern tREFBW Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 16,384 96ms 12,289 64ms 8,193 8,192 4,097 32ms 4,096 0ms tREFI 12,288 tREFI tREFBW 1. Compared to repetitive burst REFRESH with subsequent REFRESH pause. 2. As an example, in a 1Gb LPDDR2 device at TC 85C, the distributed refresh pattern has one REFRESH command per 7.8s; the burst refresh pattern has one REFRESH command per 0.52s, followed by 30ms without any REFRESH command. 77 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Figure 54: Supported Transition from Repetitive REFRESH Burst tREFBW Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 12,288 64ms 10,240 8,192 4,097 32ms 4,096 0ms tREFI 96ms 16,384 tREFI tREFBW 1. Shown with subsequent REFRESH pause to regular distributed refresh pattern. 2. As an example, in a 1Gb LPDDR2 device at TC 85C, the distributed refresh pattern has one REFRESH command per 7.8s; the burst refresh pattern has one REFRESH command per 0.52s, followed by 30ms without any REFRESH command. 78 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Figure 55: Nonsupported Transition from Repetitive REFRESH Burst tREFI 8,193 tREFW 12,288 96ms 10,240 64ms 8,192 4,097 32ms 4,096 0ms tREFI = 32ms2 0 Insufficient REFRESH commands in this refresh window! tREFBW Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tREFBW 1. Shown with subsequent REFRESH pause to regular distributed refresh pattern. 2. There are only 2048 REFRESH commands in the indicated tREFW window. This does not provide the required minimum number of REFRESH commands (R). 79 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Figure 56: Recommended Self Refresh Entry and Exit 8,192 4,097 32ms 4,096 0ms Self refresh tREFBW Note: tREFBW 1. In conjunction with a burst/pause refresh pattern. REFRESH Requirements 1. Minimum Number of REFRESH Commands Mobile LPDDR2 requires a minimum number, R, of REFRESH (REFab) commands within any rolling refresh window (tREFW = 32 ms @ MR4[2:0] = 011 or T C 85C). For actual values per density and the resulting average refresh interval (tREFI), see Table 85 (page 141). For tREFW and tREFI refresh multipliers at different MR4 settings, see the MR4 Device Temperature (MA[7:0] = 04h) table. For devices supporting per-bank REFRESH, a REFab command can be replaced by a full cycle of eight REFpb commands. 2. Burst REFRESH Limitation To limit current consumption, a maximum of eight REFab commands can be issued in any rolling tREFBW (tREFBW = 4 x 8 x tRFCab). This condition does not apply if REFpb commands are used. 3. REFRESH Requirements and Self Refresh If any time within a refresh window is spent in self refresh mode, the number of required REFRESH commands in that window is reduced to the following: R = RU tSRF t = R - RU R x SRF tREFI tREFW Where RU represents theround-up function. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 80 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 REFRESH Command Figure 57: tSRF Definition tREFW Example A1 tSRF CKE Enter self refresh mode Exit self refresh mode tREFW Example B2 tSRF CKE Enter self refresh mode Exit self refresh mode tREFW Example C3 tSRF CKE Exit self refresh mode tREFW Example D4 tSRF2 tSRF1 CKE Enter self refresh mode Exit self refresh mode Enter self refresh mode Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Exit self refresh mode Time in self refresh mode is fully enclosed in the refresh window (tREFW). At self refresh entry. At self refresh exit. Several intervals in self refresh during one tREFW interval. In this example, tSRF = tSRF1 + tSRF2. Figure 58: All-Bank REFRESH Operation T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 Tx Tx + 1 Ty Ty + 1 CK# CK CA[9:0] AB tRPab CMD PRECHARGE NOP PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tRFCab NOP REFab NOP 81 tRFCab REFab NOP Valid NOP Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 SELF REFRESH Operation Figure 59: Per-Bank REFRESH Operation T0 T1 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Ty Ty + 1 Tz Tz + 1 CK# CK CA[9:0] Bank 1 Row A AB tRPab CMD PRECHARGE tRFCpb NOP NOP REFpb NOP REFRESH to bank 0 Notes: Row A tRFCpb REFpb REFRESH to bank 1 NOP ACTIVATE NOP ACTIVATE command to bank 1 1. Prior to T0, the REFpb bank counter points to bank 0. 2. Operations to banks other than the bank being refreshed are supported during the tRFCpb period. SELF REFRESH Operation The SELF REFRESH command can be used to retain data in the array, even if the rest of the system is powered down. When in the self refresh mode, the device retains data without external clocking. The device has a built-in timer to accommodate SELF REFRESH operation. The SELF REFRESH command is executed by taking CKE LOW, CS# LOW, CA0 LOW, CA1 LOW, and CA2 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. CKE must be HIGH during the clock cycle preceding a SELF REFRESH command. A NOP command must be driven in the clock cycle following the SELF REFRESH command. After the power-down command is registered, CKE must be held LOW to keep the device in self refresh mode. Mobile LPDDR2 devices can operate in self refresh mode in both the standard and extended temperature ranges. These devices also manage self refresh power consumption when the operating temperature changes, resulting in the lowest possible power consumption across the operating temperature range. See Table 59 (page 115) for details. After the device has entered self refresh mode, all external signals other than CKE are "Don't Care." For proper self refresh operation, power supply pins (VDD1, V DD2, V DDQ, and V DDCA) must be at valid levels. V DDQ can be turned off during self refresh. If V DDQ is turned off, V REFDQ must also be turned off. Prior to exiting self refresh, both V DDQ and VREFDQ must be within their respective minimum/maximum operating ranges (see the Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for DQ and DM table). V REFDQ can be at any level between 0 and V DDQ; V REFCA can be at any level between 0 and V DDCA during self refresh. Before exiting self refresh, V REFDQ and V REFCA must be within specified limits (see AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals (page 119)). After entering self refresh mode, the device initiates at least one all-bank REFRESH command internally during tCKESR. The clock is internally disabled during SELF REFRESH operation to save power. The device must remain in self refresh mode for at least tCKESR. The user can change the external clock frequency or halt the external clock one clock after PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 82 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 SELF REFRESH Operation self refresh entry is registered; however, the clock must be restarted and stable before the device can exit SELF REFRESH operation. Exiting self refresh requires a series of commands. First, the clock must be stable prior to CKE returning HIGH. After the self refresh exit is registered, a minimum delay, at least equal to the self refresh exit interval (tXSR), must be satisfied before a valid command can be issued to the device. This provides completion time for any internal refresh in progress. For proper operation, CKE must remain HIGH throughout tXSR, except during self refresh re-entry. NOP commands must be registered on each rising clock edge during tXSR. Using self refresh mode introduces the possibility that an internally timed refresh event could be missed when CKE is driven HIGH for exit from self refresh mode. Upon exiting self refresh, at least one REFRESH command (one all-bank command or eight per-bank commands) must be issued before issuing a subsequent SELF REFRESH command. Figure 60: SELF REFRESH Operation CK/CK# Input clock frequency can be changed or clock can be stopped during self refresh. tIHCKE tIHCKE CKE tISCKE tISCKE CS# tCKESR (MIN) CMD tXSR (MIN) Exit SR Valid Enter NOP SR Enter self refresh mode NOP NOP Valid Exit self refresh mode Don't Care Notes: 1. Input clock frequency can be changed or stopped during self refresh, provided that upon exiting self-refresh, a minimum of two cycles of stable clocks are provided, and the clock frequency is between the minimum and maximum frequencies for the particular speed grade. 2. The device must be in the all banks idle state prior to entering self refresh mode. 3. tXSR begins at the rising edge of the clock after CKE is driven HIGH. 4. A valid command can be issued only after tXSR is satisfied. NOPs must be issued during tXSR. Partial-Array Self Refresh - Bank Masking Devices in densities of 64Mb-512Mb are comprised of four banks; densities of 1Gb and higher are comprised of eight banks. Each bank can be configured independently whether or not a SELF REFRESH operation will occur in that bank. One 8-bit mode register (accessible via the MRW command) is assigned to program the bank-masking status of each bank up to eight banks. For bank masking bit assignments, see the MR16 PASR Bank Mask (MA[7:0] = 010h) and MR16 Op-Code Bit Definitions tables. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 83 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 SELF REFRESH Operation The mask bit to the bank enables or disables a refresh operation of the entire memory space within the bank. If a bank is masked using the bank mask register, a REFRESH operation to the entire bank is blocked and bank data retention is not guaranteed in self refresh mode. To enable a REFRESH operation to a bank, the corresponding bank mask bit must be programmed as "unmasked." When a bank mask bit is unmasked, the array space being refreshed within that bank is determined by the programmed status of the segment mask bits. Partial-Array Self Refresh - Segment Masking Programming segment mask bits is similar to programming bank mask bits. For densities 1Gb and higher, eight segments are used for masking (see the MR17 PASR Segment Mask (MA[7:0] = 011h) and MR17 PASR Segment Mask Definitions tables). A mode register is used for programming segment mask bits up to eight bits. For densities less than 1Gb, segment masking is not supported. When the mask bit to an address range (represented as a segment) is programmed as "masked," a REFRESH operation to that segment is blocked. Conversely, when a segment mask bit to an address range is unmasked, refresh to that segment is enabled. A segment masking scheme can be used in place of or in combination with a bank masking scheme. Each segment mask bit setting is applied across all banks. For segment masking bit assignments, see the tables noted above. Table 45: Bank and Segment Masking Example Segment Mask (MR17) Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Bank 4 Bank 5 Bank 6 Bank 7 Bank Mask (MR16) 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Segment 0 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 1 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 2 1 M M M M M M M M Segment 3 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 4 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 5 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 6 0 - M - - - - - M Segment 7 1 M M M M M M M M Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. This table provides values for an 8-bank device with REFRESH operations masked to banks 1 and 7, and segments 2 and 7. 84 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ MODE REGISTER READ The MODE REGISTER READ (MRR) command is used to read configuration and status data from SDRAM mode registers. The MRR command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 LOW, CA1 LOW, CA2 LOW, and CA3 HIGH at the rising edge of the clock. The mode register is selected by CA1f-CA0f and CA9r-CA4r. The mode register contents are available on the first data beat of DQ[7:0] after RL x tCK + tDQSCK + tDQSQ and following the rising edge of the clock where MRR is issued. Subsequent data beats contain valid but undefined content, except in the case of the DQ calibration function, where subsequent data beats contain valid content as described in Table 47 (page 90). All DQS are toggled for the duration of the mode register READ burst. The MRR command has a burst length of four. MRR operation (consisting of the MRR command and the corresponding data traffic) must not be interrupted. The MRR command period (tMRR) is two clock cycles. Figure 61: MRR Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] Register Register A A Register Register B B tMRR CMD MRR1 tMRR =2 NOP2 MRR1 =2 NOP2 Valid DQS# DQS DQ[7:0]3 DOUT A DOUT B DQ[MAX:8] Transitioning data Notes: Undefined 1. MRRs to DQ calibration registers MR32 and MR40 are described in DQ Calibration (page 89). 2. Only the NOP command is supported during tMRR. 3. Mode register data is valid only on DQ[7:0] on the first beat. Subsequent beats contain valid but undefined data. DQ[MAX:8] contain valid but undefined data for the duration of the MRR burst. 4. Minimum MRR to write latency is RL + RU(tDQSCKmax/tCK) + 4/2 + 1 - WL clock cycles. 5. Minimum MRR to MRW latency is RL + RU(tDQSCKmax/tCK) + 4/2 + 1 clock cycles. READ bursts and WRITE bursts cannot be truncated by MRR. Following a READ command, the MRR command must not be issued before BL/2 clock cycles have completed. Following a WRITE command, the MRR command must not be issued before WL + 1 + BL/2 + RU(tWTR/tCK) clock cycles have completed. If a READ or WRITE burst is trunca- PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 85 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ ted with a BST command, the effective burst length of the truncated burst should be used for the BL value. Figure 62: READ to MRR Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK BL/21 RL = 3 CA[9:0] Bank m Col addr a col addr a Register B Register B tMRR CMD READ MRR =2 NOP2 Valid DQS# DQS DQ[7:0] DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DQ[MAX:8] DOUT A0 DOUT A1 DOUT A2 DOUT A3 DOUT B Transitioning data Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Undefined 1. The minimum number of clock cycles from the burst READ command to the MRR command is BL/2. 2. Only the NOP command is supported during tMRR. 86 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ Figure 63: Burst WRITE Followed by MRR - RL = 3, WL = 1, BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK WL = 3 CA[9:0] RL = 3 Bank n Col addr a col addr a Register B Register B tWTR CMD Valid WRITE tMRR MRR1 =2 NOP2 DQS# DQS DQ DIN A0 DIN A1 DIN A2 DIN A3 Transitioning data 1. The minimum number of clock cycles from the burst WRITE command to the MRR command is [WL + 1 + BL/2 + RU(tWTR/tCK)]. 2. Only the NOP command is supported during tMRR. Notes: Temperature Sensor Mobile LPDDR2 devices feature a temperature sensor whose status can be read from MR4. This sensor can be used to determine an appropriate refresh rate, determine whether AC timing derating is required in the extended temperature range, and/or monitor the operating temperature. Either the temperature sensor or the device operating temperature can be used to determine whether operating temperature requirements are being met (see Operating Temperature Range table). Temperature sensor data can be read from MR4 using the mode register read protocol. Upon exiting self-refresh or power-down, the device temperature status bits will be no older than tTSI. When using the temperature sensor, the actual device case temperature may be higher than the operating temperature specification that applies for the standard or extended temperature ranges (see table noted above). For example, T CASE could be above 85C when MR4[2:0] equals 011b. To ensure proper operation using the temperature sensor, applications must accommodate the parameters in the temperature sensor definitions table. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 87 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ Table 46: Temperature Sensor Definitions and Operating Conditions Parameter Description Symbol Min/Max Value Unit System temperature gradient Maximum temperature gradient experienced by the memory device at the temperature of interest over a range of 2C TempGradient MAX System-dependent C/s MR4 READ interval Time period between MR4 READs from the system ReadInterval MAX System-dependent ms Temperature sensor interval Maximum delay between internal updates of MR4 tTSI MAX 32 ms System response delay Maximum response time from an MR4 READ to the system response SysRespDelay MAX System-dependent ms Device temperature margin Margin above maximum temperature to support controller response TempMargin MAX 2 C Mobile LPDDR2 devices accommodate the temperature margin between the point at which the device temperature enters the extended temperature range and the point at which the controller reconfigures the system accordingly. To determine the required MR4 polling frequency, the system must use the maximum TempGradient and the maximum response time of the system according to the following equation: TempGradient x (ReadInterval + tTSI + SysRespDelay) 2C For example, if TempGradient is 10C/s and the SysRespDelay is 1ms: 10C x (ReadInterval + 32ms + 1ms) 2C s In this case, ReadInterval must not exceed 167ms. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 88 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ Figure 64: Temperature Sensor Timing Temp < (tTSI + ReadInterval + SysRespDelay) Device Temp Margin ient Grad Temp 2C MR4 Trip Level tTSI MR4 = 0x03 MR4 = 0x86 MR4 = 0x86 MR4 = 0x86 MR4 = 0x86 Time Temperture sensor update ReadInterval Host MR4 READ MRR MR4 = 0x03 SysRespDelay MRR MR4 = 0x86 DQ Calibration Mobile LPDDR2 devices feature a DQ calibration function that outputs one of two predefined system timing calibration patterns. For x16 devices, pattern A (MRR to MRR32), and pattern B (MRR to MRR40), will return the specified pattern on DQ0 and DQ8; x32 devices return the specified pattern on DQ0, DQ8, DQ16, and DQ24. For x16 devices, DQ[7:1] and DQ[15:9] drive the same information as DQ0 during the MRR burst. For x32 devices, DQ[7:1], DQ[15:9], DQ[23:17], and DQ[31:25] drive the same information as DQ0 during the MRR burst. MRR DQ calibration commands can occur only in the idle state. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 89 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER READ Figure 65: MR32 and MR40 DQ Calibration Timing - RL = 3, tMRR = 2 T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 CK# CK RL = 3 CA[9:0] Reg 32 Reg 32 Reg 40 Reg 40 tMRR CMD tMRR =2 NOP1 MRR =2 NOP MRR DQS# DQS Pattern A Pattern B DQ0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 DQ[7:1] 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 x16 DQ8 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 DQ[15:9] 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 x32 DQ16 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 DQ[23:17] 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 DQ24 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 DQ[31:25] 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 Transitioning data Note: Optionally driven the same as DQ0 or 0b 1. Only the NOP command is supported during tMRR. Table 47: Data Calibration Pattern Description Pattern MR# Bit Time 0 Bit Time 1 Bit Time 2 Pattern A MR32 1 0 1 0 Reads to MR32 return DQ calibration pattern A Pattern B MR40 0 0 1 1 Reads to MR40 return DQ calibration pattern B PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 90 Bit Time 3 Description Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER WRITE Command MODE REGISTER WRITE Command The MODE REGISTER WRITE (MRW) command is used to write configuration data to the mode registers. The MRW command is initiated with CS# LOW, CA0 LOW, CA1 LOW, CA2 LOW, and CA3 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. The mode register is selected by CA1f-CA0f, CA9r-CA4r. The data to be written to the mode register is contained in CA9f-CA2f. The MRW command period is defined by tMRW. MRWs to read-only registers have no impact on the functionality of the device. MRW can only be issued when all banks are in the idle precharge state. One method of ensuring that the banks are in this state is to issue a PRECHARGE ALL command. Figure 66: MODE REGISTER WRITE Timing - RL = 3, tMRW = 5 T0 T1 T2 Tx Tx + 1 Ty1 Tx + 2 Ty + 1 Ty + 2 CK# CK tMRW CA[9:0] CMD tMRW MR addr MR data MRW MR addr MR data NOP2 NOP2 Notes: NOP2 MRW NOP2 Valid 1. At time Ty, the device is in the idle state. 2. Only the NOP command is supported during tMRW. Table 48: Truth Table for MRR and MRW Current State All banks idle Bank(s) active Command Intermediate State Next State MRR Reading mode register, all banks idle All banks idle MRW Writing mode register, all banks idle All banks idle MRW (RESET) Resetting, device auto initialization All banks idle MRR Reading mode register, bank(s) idle Bank(s) active MRW Not allowed Not allowed MRW (RESET) Not allowed Not allowed MRW RESET Command The MRW RESET command brings the device to the device auto initialization (resetting) state in the power-on initialization sequence (see 2. RESET Command under Power-Up (page 40)). The MRW RESET command can be issued from the idle state. This command resets all mode registers to their default values. Only the NOP command is supported during tINIT4. After MRW RESET, boot timings must be observed until the device initialization sequence is complete and the device is in the idle state. Array data is undefined after the MRW RESET command has completed. For MRW RESET timing, see Figure 26 (page 42). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 91 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER WRITE Command MRW ZQ Calibration Commands The MRW command is used to initiate a ZQ calibration command that calibrates output driver impedance across process, temperature, and voltage. LPDDR2-S4 devices support ZQ calibration. To achieve tighter tolerances, proper ZQ calibration must be performed. There are four ZQ calibration commands and related timings: tZQINIT, tZQRESET, tZQCL, and tZQCS. tZQINIT is used for initialization calibration; tZQRESET is used for resetting ZQ to the default output impedance; tZQCL is used for long calibration(s); and tZQCS is used for short calibration(s). See the MR10 Calibration (MA[7:0] = 0Ah) table for ZQ calibration command code definitions. ZQINIT must be performed for LPDDR2 devices. ZQINIT provides an output impedance accuracy of 15%. After initialization, the ZQ calibration long (ZQCL) can be used to recalibrate the system to an output impedance accuracy of 15%. A ZQ calibration short (ZQCS) can be used periodically to compensate for temperature and voltage drift in the system. ZQRESET resets the output impedance calibration to a default accuracy of 30% across process, voltage, and temperature. This command is used to ensure output impedance accuracy to 30% when ZQCS and ZQCL commands are not used. One ZQCS command can effectively correct at least 1.5% (ZQ correction) of output impedance errors within tZQCS for all speed bins, assuming the maximum sensitivities specified in Table 79 and Table 80 (page 133) are met. The appropriate interval between ZQCS commands can be determined using these tables and system-specific parameters. Mobile LPDDR2 devices are subject to temperature drift rate (Tdriftrate) and voltage drift rate (Vdriftrate) in various applications. To accommodate drift rates and calculate the necessary interval between ZQCS commands, apply the following formula: ZQcorrection (Tsens x Tdriftrate ) + (Vsens x Vdriftrate ) Where T sens = MAX (dRONdT) and V sens = MAX (dRONdV) define temperature and voltage sensitivities. For example, if T sens = 0.75%/C, V sens = 0.20%/mV, T driftrate = 1C/sec, and V driftrate = 15 mV/sec, then the interval between ZQCS commands is calculated as: 1.5 = 0.4s (0.75 x 1) + (0.20 x 15) A ZQ calibration command can only be issued when the device is in the idle state with all banks precharged. No other activities can be performed on the data bus during calibration periods (tZQINIT, tZQCL, or tZQCS). The quiet time on the data bus helps to accurately calibrate output impedance. There is no required quiet time after the ZQRESET command. If multiple devices share a single ZQ resistor, only one device can be calibrating at any given time. After calibration is complete, the ZQ ball circuitry is disabled to reduce power consumption. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 92 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 MODE REGISTER WRITE Command In systems sharing a ZQ resistor between devices, the controller must prevent tZQINIT, tZQCS, and tZQCL overlap between the devices. ZQRESET overlap is acceptable. If the ZQ resistor is absent from the system, ZQ must be connected to V DDCA. In this situation, the device must ignore ZQ calibration commands and the device will use the default calibration settings. Figure 67: ZQ Timings T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 CK# CK CA[9:0] MR addr MR data ZQINIT tZQINIT CMD MRW NOP NOP NOP NOP NOP Valid NOP NOP Valid NOP NOP Valid NOP NOP Valid ZQCS tZQCS CMD MRW NOP NOP NOP ZQCL tZQCL CMD MRW NOP NOP NOP ZQRESET tZQRESET CMD MRW NOP Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN NOP NOP 1. Only the NOP command is supported during ZQ calibrations. 2. CKE must be registered HIGH continuously during the calibration period. 3. All devices connected to the DQ bus should be High-Z during the calibration process. 93 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down ZQ External Resistor Value, Tolerance, and Capacitive Loading To use the ZQ calibration function, a 240 ohm (1% tolerance) external resistor must be connected between the ZQ pin and ground. A single resistor can be used for each device or one resistor can be shared between multiple devices if the ZQ calibration timings for each device do not overlap. The total capacitive loading on the ZQ pin must be limited (see the Input/Output Capacitance table). Power-Down Power-down is entered synchronously when CKE is registered LOW and CS# is HIGH at the rising edge of clock. A NOP command must be driven in the clock cycle following power-down entry. CKE must not go LOW while MRR, MRW, READ, or WRITE operations are in progress. CKE can go LOW while any other operations such as ACTIVATE, PRECHARGE, auto precharge, or REFRESH are in progress, but the power-down IDD specification will not be applied until such operations are complete. If power-down occurs when all banks are idle, this mode is referred to as idle powerdown; if power-down occurs when there is a row active in any bank, this mode is referred to as active power-down. Entering power-down deactivates the input and output buffers, excluding CK, CK#, and CKE. In power-down mode, CKE must be held LOW; all other input signals are "Don't Care." CKE LOW must be maintained until tCKE is satisfied. V REFCA must be maintained at a valid level during power-down. VDDQ can be turned off during power-down. If V DDQ is turned off, V REFDQ must also be turned off. Prior to exiting power-down, both V DDQ and V REFDQ must be within their respective minimum/maximum operating ranges (see AC and DC Operating Conditions). No refresh operations are performed in power-down mode. The maximum duration in power-down mode is only limited by the refresh requirements outlined in REFRESH Command. The power-down state is exited when CKE is registered HIGH. The controller must drive CS# HIGH in conjunction with CKE HIGH when exiting the power-down state. CKE HIGH must be maintained until tCKE is satisfied. A valid, executable command can be applied with power-down exit latency tXP after CKE goes HIGH. Power-down exit latency is defined in the AC Timing section. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 94 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 68: Power-Down Entry and Exit Timing 2 tCK (MIN) CK/CK# Input clock frequency can be changed or the input clock can be stopped during power-down.1 tIHCKE tIHCKE tCKE (MIN) CKE tISCKE tISCKE CS# tCKE (MIN) CMD tXP (MIN) Exit PD Valid Enter NOP PD Enter power-down mode NOP Valid Valid Exit power-down mode Don't Care Note: 1. Input clock frequency can be changed or the input clock stopped during power-down, provided that the clock frequency is between the minimum and maximum specified frequencies for the speed grade in use, and that prior to power-down exit, a minimum of two stable clocks complete. Figure 69: CKE Intensive Environment CK# CK tCKE tCKE tCKE tCKE CKE Figure 70: REFRESH-to-REFRESH Timing in CKE Intensive Environments CK# CK tCKE tCKE tCKE tCKE CKE tXP CMD tREFI REFRESH Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tXP REFRESH 1. The pattern shown can repeat over an extended period of time. With this pattern, all AC and DC timing and voltage specifications with temperature and voltage drift are ensured. 95 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 71: READ to Power-Down Entry BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx + 7 Tx + 8 Tx + 9 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx + 7 Tx + 8 Tx + 9 CK# CK RL tISCKE CKE1, 2 CMD READ DQ DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DQS# DQS BL = 8 T0 T1 T2 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 CK# CK RL CKE tISCKE 1, 2 CMD READ DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DQ DQS# DQS Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CKE must be held HIGH until the end of the burst operation. 2. CKE can be registered LOW at (RL + RU(tDQSCK(MAX)/tCK) + BL/2 + 1) clock cycles after the clock on which the READ command is registered. 96 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 72: READ with Auto Precharge to Power-Down Entry BL = 4 T0 T1 T2 CK# CK Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 BL/23 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx + 7 Tx + 8 Tx + 9 Tx + 6 Tx + 7 Tx + 8 Tx + 9 tISCKE RL CKE1, 2 CMD PRE4 READ w/AP DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DQ DQS# DQS BL = 8 T0 T1 T2 CK# CK Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 Tx + 5 RL tISCKE BL/23 CKE 1, 2 CMD READ w/AP PRE4 DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DQ DQS# DQS Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CKE must be held HIGH until the end of the burst operation. 2. CKE can be registered LOW at (RL + RU(tDQSCK/tCK)+ BL/2 + 1) clock cycles after the clock on which the READ command is registered. 3. BL/2 with tRTP = 7.5ns and tRAS (MIN) is satisfied. 4. Start internal PRECHARGE. 97 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 73: WRITE to Power-Down Entry BL = 4 T0 T1 CK# CK Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 WL tISCKE BL/2 CKE1 tWR CMD WRITE DQ DIN DIN DIN DIN DQS# DQS BL = 8 T0 T1 Tm Tm +m1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tm + 4 Tm + 5 CK# CK WL tISCKE BL/2 CKE1 tWR CMD WRITE DIN DQ DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DQS# DQS Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CKE can be registered LOW at (WL + 1 + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK)) clock cycles after the clock on which the WRITE command is registered. 98 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 74: WRITE with Auto Precharge to Power-Down Entry BL = 4 T0 T1 CK# CK Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 WL tISCKE BL/2 CKE1 tWR CMD PRE2 WRITE w/AP DQ DIN DIN DIN DIN DQS# DQS BL = 8 T0 CK# CK T1 Tm Tm + 1 Tm + 2 Tm + 3 Tm + 4 Tm + 5 Tx WL tISCKE BL/2 CKE1 tWR CMD PRE2 WRITE w/AP DQ DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DQS# DQS Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CKE can be registered LOW at (WL + 1 + BL/2 + RU(tWR/tCK + 1) clock cycles after the WRITE command is registered. 2. Start internal PRECHARGE. 99 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Power-Down Figure 75: REFRESH Command to Power-Down Entry T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 CK# CK tCKE tIHCKE CKE1 tISCKE tCKE CMD REFRESH 1. CKE can go LOW tIHCKE after the clock on which the REFRESH command is registered. Note: Figure 76: ACTIVATE Command to Power-Down Entry T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 CK# CK tCKE tIHCKE CKE1 tISCKE tCKE CMD ACTIVATE 1. CKE can go LOW at tIHCKE after the clock on which the ACTIVATE command is registered. Note: Figure 77: PRECHARGE Command to Power-Down Entry T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 CK# CK tCKE CKE1 tIHCKE tISCKE tCKE CMD PRE Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CKE can go LOW tIHCKE after the clock on which the PRECHARGE command is registered. 100 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Deep Power-Down Figure 78: MRR Command to Power-Down Entry T0 T1 T2 Tx Tx + 1 Tx + 2 Tx + 3 Tx + 4 Tx + 5 Tx + 6 Tx + 7 Tx + 8 Tx + 9 CK# CK tISCKE RL CKE1 CMD MRR DOUT DOUT DOUT DOUT DQ DQS# DQS 1. CKE can be registered LOW at (RL + RU(tDQSCK/tCK)+ BL/2 + 1) clock cycles after the clock on which the MRR command is registered. Note: Figure 79: MRW Command to Power-Down Entry T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 CK# CK tISCKE CKE1 tMRW CMD MRW Note: 1. CKE can be registered LOW tMRW after the clock on which the MRW command is registered. Deep Power-Down Deep power-down (DPD) is entered when CKE is registered LOW with CS# LOW, CA0 HIGH, CA1 HIGH, and CA2 LOW at the rising edge of the clock. The NOP command must be driven in the clock cycle following power-down entry. CKE must not go LOW while MRR or MRW operations are in progress. CKE can go LOW while other operations such as ACTIVATE, auto precharge, PRECHARGE, or REFRESH are in progress, however, deep power-down IDD specifications will not be applied until those operations complete. The contents of the array will be lost upon entering DPD mode. In DPD mode, all input buffers except CKE, all output buffers, and the power supply to internal circuitry are disabled within the device. V REFDQ can be at any level between 0 and V DDQ, and V REFCA can be at any level between 0 and V DDCA during DPD. All power PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 101 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Input Clock Frequency Changes and Stop Events supplies (including V REF) must be within the specified limits prior to exiting DPD (see AC and DC Operating Conditions). To exit DPD, CKE must be HIGH, tISCKE must be complete, and the clock must be stable. To resume operation, the device must be fully reinitialized using the power-up initialization sequence. Figure 80: Deep Power-Down Entry and Exit Timing CK/CK# Input clock frequency can be changed or the input clock can be stopped during DPD. tIHCKE 2 tCK (MIN) tINIT31, 2 CKE tISCKE tISCKE CS# tDPD tRP CMD Exit DPD NOP Enter NOP DPD Enter DPD mode NOP RESET Exit DPD mode Don't Care Notes: 1. The initialization sequence can start at any time after Tx + 1. 2. tINIT3 and Tx + 1 refer to timings in the initialization sequence. For details, see Mode Register Definition. Input Clock Frequency Changes and Stop Events Input Clock Frequency Changes and Clock Stop with CKE LOW During CKE LOW, Mobile LPDDR2 devices support input clock frequency changes and clock stop under the following conditions: * Refresh requirements are met * Only REFab or REFpb commands can be in process * Any ACTIVATE or PRECHARGE commands have completed prior to changing the frequency * Related timing conditions,tRCD and tRP, have been met prior to changing the frequency * The initial clock frequency must be maintained for a minimum of two clock cycles after CKE goes LOW * The clock satisfies tCH(abs) and tCL(abs) for a minimum of two clock cycles prior to CKE going HIGH For input clock frequency changes, tCK(MIN) and tCK(MAX) must be met for each clock cycle. After the input clock frequency is changed and CKE is held HIGH, additional MRW commands may be required to set the WR, RL, etc. These settings may require adjustment to meet minimum timing requirements at the target clock frequency. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 102 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 NO OPERATION Command For clock stop, CK is held LOW and CK# is held HIGH. Input Clock Frequency Changes and Clock Stop with CKE HIGH During CKE HIGH, LPDDR2 devices support input clock frequency changes and clock stop under the following conditions: * REFRESH requirements are met * Any ACTIVATE, READ, WRITE, PRECHARGE, MRW, or MRR commands must have completed, including any associated data bursts, prior to changing the frequency * Related timing conditions, tRCD, tWR, tWRA, tRP, tMRW, and tMRR, etc., are met * CS# must be held HIGH * Only REFab or REFpb commands can be in process The device is ready for normal operation after the clock satisfies tCH(abs) and tCL(abs) for a minimum of 2 x tCK + tXP. For input clock frequency changes, tCK(MIN) and tCK(MAX) must be met for each clock cycle. After the input clock frequency is changed, additional MRW commands may be required to set the WR, RL, etc. These settings may require adjustment to meet minimum timing requirements at the target clock frequency. For clock stop, CK is held LOW and CK# is held HIGH. NO OPERATION Command The NO OPERATION (NOP) command prevents the device from registering any unwanted commands issued between operations. A NOP command can only be issued at clock cycle N when the CKE level is constant for clock cycle N-1 and clock cycle N. The NOP command has two possible encodings: CS# HIGH at the clock rising edge N; and CS# LOW with CA0, CA1, CA2 HIGH at the clock rising edge N. The NOP command will not terminate a previous operation that is still in process, such as a READ burst or WRITE burst cycle. Simplified Bus Interface State Diagram The state diagram (see Figure 81 (page 104)) provides a simplified illustration of the bus interface, supported state transitions, and the commands that control them. For a complete description of device behavior, use the information provided in the state diagram with the truth tables and timing specifications. The truth tables describe device behavior and applicable restrictions when considering the actual state of all banks. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 103 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 NO OPERATION Command Figure 81: Simplified Bus Interface State Diagram Power applied Deep power-down DPDX Power-on RE Automatic sequence SE MRR Resetting MR reading Command sequence T Self refreshing Resetting Resetting power-down MRR SR REF Idle1 Refreshing X M PD RW Idle MR reading SR T SE RE X PD EF X EF DPD PD PD Idle power-down MR writing ACT Active power-down Active MR reading PD X PD R MR Active BST PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN RD W Writing RA WR A RD Note: BST RD R W PR = PRECHARGE PRA = PRECHARGE ALL ACT = ACTIVATE WR(A) = WRITE (with auto precharge) RD(A) = READ (with auto precharge) BST = BURST TERMINATE RESET = RESET is achieved through MRW command MRW = MODE REGISTER WRITE MRR = MODE REGISTER READ PD = enter power-down PDX = exit power-down SREF = enter self refresh SREFX = exit self refresh DPD = enter deep power-down DPDX = exit deep power-down REF = REFRESH PR Reading PR, PRA WRA RDA Writing with auto precharge Reading with auto precharge Precharging 1. All banks are precharged in the idle state. 104 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Truth Tables Truth tables provide complementary information to the state diagram. They also clarify device behavior and applicable restrictions when considering the actual state of the banks. Unspecified operations and timings are illegal. To ensure proper operation after an illegal event, the device must be powered down and then restarted using the specified initialization sequence before normal operation can continue. Table 49: Command Truth Table Notes 1-11 apply to all parameters conditions Command Pins CA Pins CKE Command CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 CA5 CA6 CA7 CA8 CA9 L L L L MA0 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 X MA6 MA7 OP0 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6 OP7 H L L L L H MA0 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 H H X MA6 REFRESH (per bank) H H L L H H X REFRESH (all banks) H H L H H X Enter self refresh H L L X L X ACTIVATE (bank) H H L L H R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 BA0 BA1 BA2 H H X R0 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R13 R14 WRITE (bank) H H L H L L RFU RFU C1 C2 BA0 BA1 BA2 H H X AP C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 H H L H L H RFU RFU C1 C2 BA0 BA1 BA2 H H X AP C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 H H L H H L H AB X X BA0 BA1 BA2 H H X MRW MRR READ (bank) PRECHARGE (bank) BST Enter DPD NOP Maintain PD, SREF, DPD, (NOP) CK(n-1) CK(n) CS# CA0 H H L H H H H H L H H X H L L X L X H H L H H X L L L L L X PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN MA7 L CK Edge X H L X X L L H H X X L L H X X X H H L L X X H H L X X H H H X X H H H X X 105 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Table 49: Command Truth Table (Continued) Notes 1-11 apply to all parameters conditions Command Pins CA Pins CKE Command CK(n-1) CK(n) H H H X H H X X Maintain PD, SREF, DPD, (NOP) L L H X L L X X Enter powerdown H L H X X L X X Exit PD, SREF, DPD L H H X X H X X NOP Notes: CS# CA0 CA1 CA2 CA3 CA4 CA5 CA6 CA7 CA8 CA9 CK Edge 1. All commands are defined by the current state of CS#, CA0, CA1, CA2, CA3, and CKE at the rising edge of the clock. 2. Bank addresses (BA) determine which bank will be operated upon. 3. AP HIGH during a READ or WRITE command indicates that an auto precharge will occur to the bank associated with the READ or WRITE command. 4. X indicates a "Don't Care" state, with a defined logic level, either HIGH (H) or LOW (L). 5. Self refresh exit and DPD exit are asynchronous. 6. VREF must be between 0 and VDDQ during self refresh and DPD operation. 7. CAxr refers to command/address bit "x" on the rising edge of clock. 8. CAxf refers to command/address bit "x" on the falling edge of clock. 9. CS# and CKE are sampled on the rising edge of the clock. 10. Per-bank refresh is only supported in devices with eight banks. 11. The least-significant column address C0 is not transmitted on the CA bus, and is inferred to be zero. Table 50: CKE Truth Table Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions; L = LOW, H = HIGH, X = "Don't Care" Command n Current State CKEn-1 CKEn CS# Operation n Next State Active power-down Active power-down Idle power-down Resetting idle power-down L L X X L H H NOP L L X X L H H NOP L L X X L H H NOP PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Maintain active power-down Exit active power-down Maintain idle power-down Exit idle power-down Maintain resetting power-down Exit resetting power-down 106 Active Notes 6, 7 Idle power-down Idle 6, 7 Resetting power-down Idle or resetting 6, 7, 8 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Table 50: CKE Truth Table (Continued) Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions; L = LOW, H = HIGH, X = "Don't Care" Command n Current State CKEn-1 CKEn CS# Operation n Next State Deep powerdown Deep power-down Self refresh L L X X L H H NOP Maintain deep power-down Exit deep power-down Power-on L L X X L H H NOP Exit self refresh Bank(s) active H L H NOP Enter active power-down Active power-down All banks idle H L H NOP Enter idle power-down Idle power-down H L L Enter self refresh H L L DPD Enter deep power-down Deep power-down Resetting H L H NOP Enter resetting power-down Resetting power-down Other states H H Notes: Maintain self refresh Notes 9 Self refresh Idle Enter self refresh 10, 11 Self refresh Refer to the command truth table 1. Current state = the state of the device immediately prior to the clock rising edge n. 2. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved unless explicitly described elsewhere in this document. 3. CKEn = the logic state of CKE at clock rising edge n; CKEn-1 was the state of CKE at the previous clock edge. 4. CS#= the logic state of CS# at the clock rising edge n. 5. Command n = the command registered at clock edge n, and operation n is a result of command n. 6. Power-down exit time (tXP) must elapse before any command other than NOP is issued. 7. The clock must toggle at least twice prior to the tXP period. 8. Upon exiting the resetting power-down state, the device will return to the idle state if tINIT5 has expired. 9. The DPD exit procedure must be followed as described in Deep Power-Down (page 101). 10. Self refresh exit time (tXSR) must elapse before any command other than NOP is issued. 11. The clock must toggle at least twice prior to the tXSR time. Table 51: Current State Bank n to Command to Bank n Truth Table Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions Current State Command Any NOP PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Operation Next State Continue previous operation 107 Notes Current state Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Table 51: Current State Bank n to Command to Bank n Truth Table (Continued) Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters and conditions Current State Command Idle ACTIVATE Refresh (per bank) Refresh (all banks) Row active Select and activate row Notes Active Begin to refresh Refreshing (per bank) 6 Begin to refresh Refreshing (all banks) 7 MR writing 7 Load value to mode register MRR Read value from mode register Idle, MR reading RESET Begin device auto initialization Resetting 7, 8 9, 10 PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Precharging READ Select column and start read burst Reading WRITE Select column and start write burst Writing Read value from mode register PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Active MR reading Precharging 9 READ Select column and start new read burst Reading 11, 12 WRITE Select column and start write burst Writing 11, 12, 13 Active 14 BST Writing Next State MRW MRR Reading Operation Read burst terminate WRITE Select column and start new write burst Writing 11, 12 READ Select column and start read burst Reading 11, 12, 15 Active 14 7, 9 BST Write burst terminate Power-on MRW RESET Begin device auto initialization Resetting Resetting MRR Read value from mode register Resetting MR reading Notes: 1. Values in this table apply when both CKEn -1 and CKEn are HIGH, and after tXSR or tXP has been met, if the previous state was power-down. 2. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved. 3. Current state definitions: Idle: The bank or banks have been precharged, and tRP has been met. Active: A row in the bank has been activated, and tRCD has been met. No data bursts or accesses and no register accesses are in progress. Reading: A READ burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and has not yet terminated or been terminated. Writing: A WRITE burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and has not yet terminated or been terminated. 4. The states listed below must not be interrupted by a command issued to the same bank. NOP commands or supported commands to the other bank must be issued on any clock edge occurring during these states. Supported commands to the other banks are determined by that bank's current state, and the definitions given in Table 52 (page 109). Precharge: Starts with registration of a PRECHARGE command and ends when tRP is met. After tRP is met, the bank is in the idle state. Row activate: Starts with registration of an ACTIVATE command and ends when tRCD is met. After tRCD is met, the bank is in the active state. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 108 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables READ with AP enabled: Starts with registration of a READ command with auto precharge enabled and ends when tRP is met. After tRP is met, the bank is in the idle state. WRITE with AP enabled: Starts with registration of a WRITE command with auto precharge enabled and ends when tRP is met. After tRP is met, the bank is in the idle state. 5. The states listed below must not be interrupted by any executable command. NOP commands must be applied to each rising clock edge during these states. Refresh (per bank): Starts with registration of a REFRESH (per bank) command and ends when tRFCpb is met. After tRFCpb is met, the bank is in the idle state. Refresh (all banks): Starts with registration of a REFRESH (all banks) command and ends when tRFCab is met. After tRFCab is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Idle MR reading: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR is met. After tMRR is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Resetting MR reading: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR is met. After tMRR is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Active MR reading: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR is met. After tMRR is met, the bank is in the active state. MR writing: Starts with registration of the MRW command and ends when tMRW is met. After tMRW is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Precharging all: Starts with registration of a PRECHARGE ALL command and ends when tRP is met. After tRP is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Bank-specific; requires that the bank is idle and no bursts are in progress. Not bank-specific; requires that all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress. Not bank-specific. This command may or may not be bank specific. If all banks are being precharged, they must be in a valid state for precharging. If a PRECHARGE command is issued to a bank in the idle state, tRP still applies. A command other than NOP should not be issued to the same bank while a burst READ or burst WRITE with auto precharge is enabled. The new READ or WRITE command could be auto precharge enabled or auto precharge disabled. A WRITE command can be issued after the completion of the READ burst; otherwise, a BST must be issued to end the READ prior to asserting a WRITE command. Not bank-specific. The BST command affects the most recent READ/WRITE burst started by the most recent READ/WRITE command, regardless of bank. A READ command can be issued after completion of the WRITE burst; otherwise, a BST must be used to end the WRITE prior to asserting another READ command. Table 52: Current State Bank n to Command to Bank m Truth Table Notes 1-6 apply to all parameters and conditions Current State of Bank n Command to Bank m Operation Next State for Bank m Any NOP Continue previous operation Idle Any Any command supported to bank m PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 109 Notes Current state of bank m - 7 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Table 52: Current State Bank n to Command to Bank m Truth Table (Continued) Notes 1-6 apply to all parameters and conditions Current State of Bank n Command to Bank m Row activating, active, or precharging ACTIVATE Writing (auto precharge disabled) Reading with auto precharge Writing with auto precharge Select and activate row in bank m Next State for Bank m Notes Active 8 READ Select column and start READ burst from bank m Reading 9 WRITE Select column and start WRITE burst to bank m Writing 9 Precharging 10 Idle MR reading or active MR reading 11, 12, 13 Active 7 PRECHARGE Reading (auto precharge disabled) Operation Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks MRR READ value from mode register BST READ or WRITE burst terminates an ongoing READ/WRITE from/to bank m READ Select column and start READ burst from bank m Reading 9 WRITE Select column and start WRITE burst to bank m Writing 9, 14 ACTIVATE Select and activate row in bank m Active PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Precharging 10 READ Select column and start READ burst from bank m Reading 9, 15 WRITE Select column and start WRITE burst to bank m Writing 9 ACTIVATE Select and activate row in bank m Active PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Precharging 10 READ Select column and start READ burst from bank m Reading 9, 16 WRITE Select column and start WRITE burst to bank m Writing 9, 14, 16 ACTIVATE Select and activate row in bank m Active PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Precharging 10 READ Select column and start READ burst from bank m Reading 9, 15, 16 WRITE Select column and start WRITE burst to bank m Writing 9, 16 ACTIVATE Select and activate row in bank m Active PRECHARGE Deactivate row(s) in bank or banks Precharging 10 17, 18 Power-on MRW RESET Begin device auto initialization Resetting Resetting MRR Read value from mode register Resetting MR reading Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. This table applies when: the previous state was self refresh or power-down; after tXSR or tXP has been met; and both CKEn -1 and CKEn are HIGH. 2. All states and sequences not shown are illegal or reserved. 110 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables 3. Current state definitions: Idle: The bank has been precharged and tRP has been met. Active: A row in the bank has been activated, tRCD has been met, no data bursts or accesses and no register accesses are in progress. Read: A READ burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and the READ has not yet terminated or been terminated. Write: A WRITE burst has been initiated with auto precharge disabled and the WRITE has not yet terminated or been terminated. 4. Refresh, self refresh, and MRW commands can only be issued when all banks are idle. 5. A BST command cannot be issued to another bank; it applies only to the bank represented by the current state. 6. The states listed below must not be interrupted by any executable command. NOP commands must be applied during each clock cycle while in these states: Idle MRR: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR has been met. After tMRR is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Reset MRR: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR has been met. After tMRR is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. Active MRR: Starts with registration of the MRR command and ends when tMRR has been met. After tMRR is met, the bank is in the active state. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN MRW: Starts with registration of the MRW command and ends when tMRW has been met. After tMRW is met, the device is in the all banks idle state. BST is supported only if a READ or WRITE burst is ongoing. tRRD must be met between the ACTIVATE command to bank n and any subsequent ACTIVATE command to bank m. READs or WRITEs listed in the command column include READs and WRITEs with or without auto precharge enabled. This command may or may not be bank-specific. If all banks are being precharged, they must be in a valid state for precharging. MRR is supported in the row-activating state. MRR is supported in the precharging state. The next state for bank m depends on the current state of bank m (idle, row-activating, precharging, or active). A WRITE command can be issued after the completion of the READ burst; otherwise a BST must be issued to end the READ prior to asserting a WRITE command. A READ command can be issued after the completion of the WRITE burst; otherwise, a BST must be issued to end the WRITE prior to asserting another READ command. A READ with auto precharge enabled or a WRITE with auto precharge enabled can be followed by any valid command to other banks provided that the timing restrictions in the PRECHARGE and Auto Precharge Clarification table are met. Not bank-specific; requires that all banks are idle and no bursts are in progress. RESET command is achieved through MODE REGISTER WRITE command. 111 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Truth Tables Table 53: DM Truth Table Functional Name Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN DM DQ Notes Write enable L Valid 1 Write inhibit H X 1 1. Used to mask write data, and is provided simultaneously with the corresponding input data. 112 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Electrical Specifications Electrical Specifications Absolute Maximum Ratings Stresses greater than those listed below may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions outside those indicated in the operational sections of this document is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may adversely affect reliability. Table 54: Absolute Maximum DC Ratings Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit Notes VDD1 supply voltage relative to VSS VDD1 -0.4 +2.3 V 1 VDD2 supply voltage relative to VSS VDD2 (1.2V) -0.4 +1.6 V 1 VDDCA supply voltage relative to VSSCA VDDCA -0.4 +1.6 V 1, 2 VDDQ supply voltage relative to VSSQ VDDQ -0.4 +1.6 V 1, 3 VIN, VOUT -0.4 +1.6 V TSTG -55 +125 C Voltage on any ball relative to VSS Storage temperature Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 4 See 1. Voltage Ramp under Power-Up (page 40). VREFCA 0.6 VDDCA; however, VREFCA may be VDDCA provided that VREFCA 300mV. VREFDQ 0.6 VDDQ; however, VREFDQ may be VDDQ provided that VREFDQ 300mV. Storage temperature is the case surface temperature on the center/top side of the device. For measurement conditions, refer to the JESD51-2 standard. Input/Output Capacitance Table 55: Input/Output Capacitance Note 1 applies to all parameters and conditions LPDDR2 1066-466 Parameter LPDDR2 400-200 Symbol MIN MAX MIN MAX Unit Notes Input capacitance, CK and CK# CCK 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 pF 2, 3 Input capacitance delta, CK and CK# CDCK 0 0.20 0 0.25 pF 2, 3, 4 Input capacitance, all other inputonly pins CI 1.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 pF 2, 3, 5 Input capacitance delta, all other inputonly pins CDI -0.40 +0.40 -0.50 +0.50 pF 2, 3, 6 Input/output capacitance, DQ, DM, DQS, DQS# CIO 1.25 2.5 1.25 2.5 pF 2, 3, 7, 8 CDDQS 0 0.25 0 0.30 pF 2, 3, 8, 9 Input/output capacitance delta, DQ, DM CDIO -0.5 +0.5 -0.6 +0.6 pF 2, 3, 8, 10 Input/output capacitance ZQ CZQ 0 2.5 0 2.5 pF 2, 3, 11 Input/output capacitance delta, DQS, DQS# Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. TC -25C to +105C; VDDQ = 1.14-1.3V; VDDCA = 1.14-1.3V; VDD1 = 1.7-1.95V; VDD2 = 1.14- 1.3V. 113 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Electrical Specifications - IDD Specifications and Conditions 2. This parameter applies to die devices only (does not include package capacitance). 3. This parameter is not subject to production testing. It is verified by design and characterization. The capacitance is measured according to JEP147 (procedure for measuring input capacitance using a vector network analyzer), with VDD1, VDD2, VDDQ, VSS, VSSCA, and VSSQ applied; all other pins are left floating. 4. Absolute value of CCK - CCK#. 5. CI applies to CS#, CKE, and CA[9:0]. 6. CDI = CI - 0.5 x (CCK + CCK#). 7. DM loading matches DQ and DQS. 8. MR3 I/O configuration drive strength OP[3:0] = 0001b (34.3 ohm typical). 9. Absolute value of CDQS and CDQS#. 10. CDIO = CIO - 0.5 x (CDQS + CDQS#) in byte-lane. 11. Maximum external load capacitance on ZQ pin: 5pF. Electrical Specifications - IDD Specifications and Conditions The following definitions and conditions are used in the IDD measurement tables unless stated otherwise: * * * * LOW: V IN V IL(DC)max HIGH: V IN V IH(DC)min STABLE: Inputs are stable at a HIGH or LOW level SWITCHING: See the following three tables Table 56: Switching for CA Input Signals Notes 1-3 apply to all parameters and conditions CK Rising/ CK Falling/ CK Rising/ CK#Falling CK# Rising CK#Falling Cycle CS# CK Falling/ CK# Rising CK Rising/ CK#Falling CK Falling/ CK# Rising CK Rising/ CK#Falling CK Falling/ CK# Rising N N+1 N+2 N+3 HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH CA0 H L L L L H H H CA1 H H H L L L L H CA2 H L L L L H H H CA3 H H H L L L L H CA4 H L L L L H H H CA5 H H H L L L L H CA6 H L L L L H H H CA7 H H H L L L L H CA8 H L L L L H H H CA9 H H H L L L L H Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. CS# must always be driven HIGH. 2. For each clock cycle, 50% of the CA bus is changing between HIGH and LOW. 3. The noted pattern (N, N + 1, N + 2, N + 3...) is used continuously during IDD measurement for IDD values that require switching on the CA bus. 114 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Electrical Specifications - IDD Specifications and Conditions Table 57: Switching for IDD4R Clock CKE CS# Clock Cycle Number Command CA[2:0] CA[9:3] All DQ Rising H L N Read_Rising HLH LHLHLHL L Falling H L N Read_Falling LLL LLLLLLL L Rising H H N +1 NOP LLL LLLLLLL H Falling H H N+1 NOP HLH LHLLHLH L Rising H L N+2 Read_Rising HLH LHLLHLH H Falling H L N+2 Read_Falling LLL HHHHHHH H Rising H H N+3 NOP LLL HHHHHHH H Falling H H N+3 NOP HLH LHLHLHL L Notes: 1. Data strobe (DQS) is changing between HIGH and LOW with every clock cycle. 2. The noted pattern (N, N + 1...) is used continuously during IDD measurement for IDD4R. Table 58: Switching for IDD4W Clock CKE CS# Clock Cycle Number Command CA[2:0] CA[9:3] All DQ Rising H L N Write_Rising LLH LHLHLHL L Falling H L N Write_Falling LLL LLLLLLL L Rising H H N +1 NOP LLL LLLLLLL H Falling H H N+1 NOP HLH LHLLHLH L Rising H L N+2 Write_Rising LLH LHLLHLH H Falling H L N+2 Write_Falling LLL HHHHHHH H Rising H H N+3 NOP LLL HHHHHHH H Falling H H N+3 NOP HLH LHLHLHL L Notes: 1. Data strobe (DQS) is changing between HIGH and LOW with every clock cycle. 2. Data masking (DM) must always be driven LOW. 3. The noted pattern (N, N + 1...) is used continuously during IDD measurement for IDD4W. Table 59: IDD Specification Parameters and Operating Conditions Notes 1-3 apply to all parameters and conditions Parameter/Condition Operating one bank active-precharge current (SDRAM): tCK = tCKmin; tRC = tRCmin; CKE is HIGH; CS# is HIGH between valid commands; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable tCK tCKmin; = CKE is LOW; CS# is HIGH; Idle power-down standby current: All banks are idle; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 115 Symbol Power Supply IDD01 VDD1 IDD02 VDD2 IDD0in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD2P1 VDD1 IDD2P2 VDD2 IDD2P,in VDDCA, VDDQ Notes 4 4 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Electrical Specifications - IDD Specifications and Conditions Table 59: IDD Specification Parameters and Operating Conditions (Continued) Notes 1-3 apply to all parameters and conditions Parameter/Condition Idle power-down standby current with clock stop: CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH; CKE is LOW; CS# is HIGH; All banks are idle; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable Idle non-power-down standby current: tCK = tCKmin; CKE is HIGH; CS# is HIGH; All banks are idle; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable Idle non-power-down standby current with clock stopped: CK = LOW; CK# = HIGH; CKE is HIGH; CS# is HIGH; All banks are idle; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable tCK tCKmin; = CKE is LOW; CS# is Active power-down standby current: HIGH; One bank is active; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable Active power-down standby current with clock stop: CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH; CKE is LOW; CS# is HIGH; One bank is active; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable Active non-power-down standby current: tCK = tCKmin; CKE is HIGH; CS# is HIGH; One bank is active; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable Active non-power-down standby current with clock stopped: CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH CKE is HIGH; CS# is HIGH; One bank is active; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable tCK tCKmin; = CS# is HIGH between valid Operating burst READ current: commands; One bank is active; BL = 4; RL = RL (MIN); CA bus inputs are switching; 50% data change each burst transfer tCK tCKmin; = CS# is HIGH between valid Operating burst WRITE current: commands; One bank is active; BL = 4; WL = WLmin; CA bus inputs are switching; 50% data change each burst transfer tCK tCKmin; = CKE is HIGH between valid All-bank REFRESH burst current: commands; tRC = tRFCabmin; Burst refresh; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable All-bank REFRESH average current: tCK = tCKmin; CKE is HIGH between valid commands; tRC = tREFI; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable tCK tCKmin; = CKE is HIGH between Per-bank REFRESH average current: valid commands; tRC = tREFI/8; CA bus inputs are switching; Data bus inputs are stable PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 116 Symbol Power Supply IDD2PS1 VDD1 IDD2PS2 VDD2 IDD2PS,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD2N1 VDD1 IDD2N2 VDD2 IDD2N,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD2NS1 VDD1 IDD2NS2 VDD2 IDD2NS,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD3P1 VDD1 IDD3P2 VDD2 IDD3P,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD3PS1 VDD1 IDD3PS2 VDD2 IDD3PS,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD3N1 VDD1 IDD3N2 VDD2 IDD3N,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD3NS1 VDD1 IDD3NS2 VDD2 IDD3NS,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD4R1 VDD1 IDD4R2 VDD2 IDD4R,in VDDCA IDD4RQ VDDQ IDD4W1 VDD1 IDD4W2 VDD2 IDD4W,in VDDCA, VDDQ IDD51 VDD1 IDD52 VDD2 Notes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 IDD5IN VDDCA, VDDQ IDD5AB1 VDD1 4 IDD5AB2 VDD2 IDD5AB,in VDDCA, VDDQ 4 IDD5PB1 VDD1 6 IDD5PB2 VDD2 6 IDD5PB,in VDDCA, VDDQ 4, 6 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Operating Conditions Table 59: IDD Specification Parameters and Operating Conditions (Continued) Notes 1-3 apply to all parameters and conditions Parameter/Condition Self refresh current (-25C to +85C): CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH; CKE is LOW; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable; Maximum 1x self refresh rate Self refresh current (+85C to +105C): CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH; CKE is LOW; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable Deep power-down current: CK = LOW, CK# = HIGH; CKE is LOW; CA bus inputs are stable; Data bus inputs are stable Symbol Power Supply Notes IDD61 VDD1 7 IDD62 VDD2 7 IDD6IN VDDCA, VDDQ 4, 7 IDD6ET1 VDD1 7, 8 IDD6ET2 VDD2 7, 8 IDD6ET,in VDDCA, VDDQ 4, 7, 8 IDD81 VDD1 8 IDD82 VDD2 8 IDD8IN VDDCA, VDDQ 4, 8 1. IDD values are the maximum of the distribution of the arithmetic mean. 2. IDD current specifications are tested after the device is properly initialized. 3. The 1x self refresh rate is the rate at which the device is refreshed internally during self refresh, before going into the extended temperature range. 4. Measured currents are the sum of VDDQ and VDDCA. 5. Guaranteed by design with output reference load and RON = 40 ohm. 6. Per-bank REFRESH is only applicable for LPDDR2-S4 device densities 1Gb or higher. 7. This is the general definition that applies to full-array self refresh. 8. IDD6ET and IDD8 are typical values, are sampled only, and are not tested. Notes: AC and DC Operating Conditions Operation or timing that is not specified is illegal. To ensure proper operation, the device must be initialized properly. Table 60: Recommended DC Operating Conditions LPDDR2-S4B Symbol Min Typ Max Power Supply Unit VDD1 1 1.70 1.80 1.95 Core power 1 V VDD2 1.14 1.20 1.30 Core power 2 V VDDCA 1.14 1.20 1.30 Input buffer power V VDDQ 1.14 1.20 1.30 I/O buffer power V Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. VDD1 uses significantly less power than VDD2. 117 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Operating Conditions Table 61: Input Leakage Current Parameter/Condition Notes: Symbol Min Max Unit Notes Input leakage current: For CA, CKE, CS#, CK, CK#; Any input 0V VIN VDDCA; (All other pins not under test = 0V) IL -2 2 A 1 VREF supply leakage current: VREFDQ = VDDQ/2, or VREFCA = VDDCA/2; (All other pins not under test = 0V) IVREF -1 1 A 2 1. Although DM is for input only, the DM leakage must match the DQ and DQS/DQS# output leakage specification. 2. The minimum limit requirement is for testing purposes. The leakage current on VREFCA and VREFDQ pins should be minimal. Table 62: Operating Temperature Range Parameter/Condition IT temperature range AT temperature range Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Symbol Min Max Unit TCASE1 -25 +85 C -40 +105 C 1. Operating temperature is the case surface temperature at the center of the top side of the device. For measurement conditions, refer to the JESD51-2 standard. 2. Some applications require operation in the maximum case temperature range, between 85C and 105C. For some LPDDR2 devices, derating may be necessary to operate in this range (see the MR4 Device Temperature (MA[7:0] = 04h) table). 3. Either the device operating temperature or the temperature sensor can be used to set an appropriate refresh rate, determine the need for AC timing derating, and/or monitor the operating temperature (see Temperature Sensor (page 87)). When using the temperature sensor, the actual device case temperature may be higher than the TCASE rating that applies for the operating temperature range. For example, TCASE could be above 85C when the temperature sensor indicates a temperature of less than 85C. 118 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals Table 63: Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for CA and CS# Inputs LPDDR2-1066 to LPDDR2-466 LPDDR2-400 to LPDDR2-200 Symbol Parameter Min Max Min Max Unit Notes VIHCA(AC) AC input logic HIGH VREF + 0.220 Note 2 VREF + 0.300 Note 2 V 1, 2 VILCA(AC) AC input logic LOW Note 2 VREF - 0.220 Note 2 VREF - 0.300 V 1, 2 VIHCA(DC) DC input logic HIGH VREF + 0.130 VDDCA VREF + 0.200 VDDCA V 1 VILCA(DC) DC input logic LOW VSSCA VREF - 0.130 VSSCA VREF - 0.200 V 1 0.49 x VDDCA 0.51 x VDDCA 0.49 x VDDCA 0.51 x VDDCA V 3, 4 VREFCA(DC) Reference voltage for CA and CS# inputs Notes: 1. For CA and CS# input-only pins. VREF = VREFCA(DC). 2. See Figure 91 (page 130). 3. The AC peak noise on VREFCA could prevent VREFCA from deviating more than 1% VDDCA from VREFCA(DC) (for reference, approximately 12mV). 4. For reference, approximately VDDCA/2 12mV. Table 64: Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for CKE Symbol Min Max Unit Notes VIHCKE CKE input HIGH level Parameter 0.8 x VDDCA Note 1 V 1 VILCKE CKE input LOW level Note 1 0.2 x VDDCA V 1 Note: 1. See Figure 91 (page 130). Table 65: Single-Ended AC and DC Input Levels for DQ and DM LPDDR2-1066 to LPDDR2-466 LPDDR2-400 to LPDDR2-200 Symbol VIHDQ(AC) Parameter AC input logic HIGH Min Max Min Max Unit Notes VREF + 0.220 Note 2 VREF + 0.300 Note 2 V 1, 2 VILDQ(AC) AC input logic LOW Note 2 VREF - 0.220 Note 2 VREF - 0.300 V 1, 2 VIHDQ(DC) DC input logic HIGH VREF + 0.130 VDDQ VREF + 0.200 VDDQ V 1 VILDQ(DC) DC input logic LOW VSSQ VREF - 0.130 VSSQ VREF - 0.200 V 1 0.49 x VDDQ 0.51 x VDDQ 0.49 x VDDQ 0.51 x VDDQ V 3, 4 VREFDQ(DC) Reference voltage for DQ and DM inputs Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. For DQ input-only pins. VREF = VREFDQ(DC). 2. See Figure 91 (page 130). 3. The AC peak noise on VREFDQ could prevent VREFDQ from deviating more than 1% VDDQ from VREFDQ(DC) (for reference, approximately 12mV). 4. For reference, approximately. VDDQ/2 12mV. 119 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals VREF Tolerances The DC tolerance limits and AC noise limits for the reference voltages V REFCA and VREFDQ are illustrated below. This figure shows a valid reference voltage V REF(t) as a function of time. V DD is used in place of V DDCA for V REFCA, and V DDQ for V REFDQ. V REF(DC) is the linear average of V REF(t) over a very long period of time (for example, 1 second) and is specified as a fraction of the linear average of V DDQ or V DDCA, also over a very long period of time (for example, 1 second). This average must meet the MIN/MAX requirements in Table 63 (page 119). Additionally, V REF(t) can temporarily deviate from V REF(DC) by no more than 1% V DD. V REF(t) cannot track noise on V DDQ or V DDCA if doing so would force V REF outside these specifications. Figure 82: VREF DC Tolerance and VREF AC Noise Limits VDD Voltage VREF(AC) noise VREF(t) VREF(DC)max VREF(DC) VDD/2 VREF(DC)min VSS Time The voltage levels for setup and hold time measurements V IH(AC), V IH(DC), V IL(AC), and VIL(DC) are dependent on V REF. VREF DC variations affect the absolute voltage a signal must reach to achieve a valid HIGH or LOW, as well as the time from which setup and hold times are measured. When VREF is outside the specified levels, devices will function correctly with appropriate timing deratings as long as: * VREF is maintained between 0.44 x V DDQ (or V DDCA) and 0.56 x V DDQ (or V DDCA), and * the controller achieves the required single-ended AC and DC input levels from instantaneous V REF (see Table 63 (page 119)). System timing and voltage budgets must account for V REF deviations outside this range. The setup/hold specification and derating values must include time and voltage associated with V REF AC noise. Timing and voltage effects due to AC noise on V REF up to the specified limit (1% V DD) are included in LPDDR2 timings and their associated deratings. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 120 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals Input Signal Figure 83: LPDDR2-466 to LPDDR2-1066 Input Signal VIL and VIH levels with ringback 1.550V VDD + 0.35V narrow pulse width 1.200V VDD 0.820V VIH(AC) 0.730V VIH(DC) 0.624V 0.612V 0.600V 0.588V 0.576V VREF + AC noise VREF + DC error VREF - DC error VREF - AC noise 0.470V VIL(DC) 0.380V VIL(AC) 0.000V VSS Minimum VIL and VIH levels 0.820V 0.730V VIH(AC) VIH(DC) 0.624V 0.612V 0.600V 0.588V 0.576V 0.470V VIL(DC) 0.380V VIL(AC) VSS - 0.35V narrow pulse width -0.350V Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Numbers reflect typical values. 2. For CA[9:0], CK, CK#, and CS# VDD stands for VDDCA. For DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#, VDD stands for VDDQ. 3. For CA[9:0], CK, CK#, and CS# VSS stands for VSSCA. For DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#, VSS stands for VSSQ. 121 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Single-Ended Signals Figure 84: LPDDR2-200 to LPDDR2-400 Input Signal VIL and VIH levels with ringback 1.550V VDD + 0.35V narrow pulse width 1.200V VDD 0.900V VIH(AC) 0.800V VIH(DC) 0.624V 0.612V 0.600V 0.588V 0.576V VREF + AC noise VREF + DC error VREF - DC error VREF - AC noise Minimum VIL and VIH levels 0.900V 0.800V VIH(AC) VIH(DC) 0.624V 0.612V 0.600V 0.588V 0.576V 0.400V VIL(DC) 0.300V 0.400V VIL(DC) 0.300V VIL(AC) 0.000V VSS VIL(AC) VSS - 0.35V narrow pulse width -0.350V Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Numbers reflect typical values. 2. For CA[9:0], CK, CK#, and CS# VDD stands for VDDCA. For DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#, VDD stands for VDDQ. 3. For CA[9:0], CK, CK#, and CS# VSS stands for VSSCA. For DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#, VSS stands for VSSQ. 122 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals Figure 85: Differential AC Swing Time and tDVAC tDVAC Differential Voltage VIH,diff(AC)min VIH,diff(DC)min CK, CK# DQS, DQS# 0.0 VIH,diff(DC)max tDVAC 1/2 cycle VIH,diff(AC)max Time Table 66: Differential AC and DC Input Levels For CK and CK#, VREF = VREFCA(DC); For DQS and DQS# VREF = VREFDQ(DC) LPDDR2-1066 to LPDDR2-466 LPDDR2-400 to LPDDR2-200 Symbol Parameter Min Max Min Max VIH,diff(AC) Differential input HIGH AC 2 x (VIH(AC) - VREF) Note 1 2 x (VIH(AC) - VREF) Note 1 V 2 VIL,diff(AC) Differential input LOW AC Note 1 2 x (VREF - VIL(AC)) Note 1 2 x (VREF - VIL(AC)) V 2 VIH,diff(DC) Differential input HIGH 2 x (VIH(DC) - VREF) Note 1 2 x (VIH(DC) - VREF) Note 1 V 3 VIL,diff(DC) Differential input LOW Note 1 2 x (VREF - VIL(DC)) Note 1 2 x (VREF - VIL(DC)) V 3 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Unit Notes 1. These values are not defined, however the single-ended signals CK, CK#, DQS, and DQS# must be within the respective limits (VIH(DC)max, VIL(DC)min) for single-ended signals and must comply with the specified limitations for overshoot and undershoot (see Figure 91 (page 130)). 123 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals 2. For CK and CK#, use VIH/VIL(AC) of CA and VREFCA; for DQS and DQS#, use VIH/VIL(AC) of DQ and VREFDQ. If a reduced AC HIGH or AC LOW is used for a signal group, the reduced voltage level also applies. 3. Used to define a differential signal slew rate. Table 67: CK/CK# and DQS/DQS# Time Requirements Before Ringback (tDVAC) tDVAC (ps) at VIH/VILdiff(AC) = 440mV tDVAC (ps) at VIH/VILdiff(AC) = 600mV Slew Rate (V/ns) Min Min > 4.0 175 75 4.0 170 57 3.0 167 50 2.0 163 38 1.8 162 34 1.6 161 29 1.4 159 22 1.2 155 13 1.0 150 0 < 1.0 150 0 Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals Each individual component of a differential signal (CK, CK#, DQS, and DQS#) must also comply with certain requirements for single-ended signals. CK and CK# must meet V SEH(AC)min/VSEL(AC)max in every half cycle. DQS, DQS# must meet V SEH(AC)min/VSEL(AC)max in every half cycle preceding and following a valid transition. The applicable AC levels for CA and DQ differ by speed bin. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 124 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals Figure 86: Single-Ended Requirements for Differential Signals VDDCA or VDDQ VSEH(AC) Differential Voltage VSEH(AC)min VDDCA/2 or VDDQ/2 CK or DQS VSEL(AC)max VSEL(AC) VSSCA or VSSQ Time Note that while CA and DQ signal requirements are referenced to V REF, the single-ended components of differential signals also have a requirement with respect to VDDQ/2 for DQS, and V DDCA/2 for CK. The transition of single-ended signals through the AC levels is used to measure setup time. For single-ended components of differential signals, the requirement to reach VSEL(AC)max or V SEH(AC)min has no bearing on timing. This requirement does, however, add a restriction on the common mode characteristics of these signals (see Table 63 (page 119) for CK/CK# single-ended requirements, and Table 65 (page 119) for DQ and DQM single-ended requirements). Table 68: Single-Ended Levels for CK, CK#, DQS, DQS# LPDDR2-1066 to LPDDR2-466 Symbol VSEH(AC) VSEL(AC) Parameter LPDDR2-400 to LPDDR2-200 Min Max Min Max Single-ended HIGH level for strobes (VDDQ/2) + 0.220 Note 1 (VDDQ/2) + 0.300 Note 1 V 2, 3 Single-ended HIGH level for CK, CK# (VDDCA/2) + 0.220 Note 1 (VDDCA/2) + 0.300 Note 1 V 2, 3 Single-ended LOW level for strobes Note 1 (VDDQ/2) - 0.220 Note 1 (VDDQ/2) + 0.300 V 2, 3 Single-ended LOW level for CK, CK# Note 1 (VDDCA/2) - 0.220 Note 1 (VDDCA/2) + 0.300 V 2, 3 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN Unit Notes 1. These values are not defined, however, the single-ended signals CK, CK#, DQS0, DQS#0, DQS1, DQS#1, DQS2, DQS#2, DQS3, DQS#3 must be within the respective limits (VIH(DC)max/ VIL(DC)min) for single-ended signals, and must comply with the specified limitations for overshoot and undershoot (see Figure 91 (page 130)). 125 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC and DC Logic Input Measurement Levels for Differential Signals 2. For CK and CK#, use VSEH/VSEL(AC) of CA; for strobes (DQS[3:0] and DQS#[3:0]), use VIH/VIL(AC) of DQ. 3. VIH(AC) and VIL(AC) for DQ are based on VREFDQ; VSEH(AC) and VSEL(AC) for CA are based on VREFCA. If a reduced AC HIGH or AC LOW is used for a signal group, the reduced level applies. Differential Input Crosspoint Voltage To ensure tight setup and hold times as well as output skew parameters with respect to clock and strobe, each crosspoint voltage of differential input signals (CK, CK#, DQS, and DQS#) must meet the specifications in Table 68 (page 125). The differential input crosspoint voltage (VIX) is measured from the actual crosspoint of the true signal and its and complement to the midlevel between V DD and V SS. Figure 87: VIX Definition VDDCA, VDDQ VDDCA, VDDQ CK#, DQS# CK#, DQS# X VIX VIX VDDCA/2, VDDQ/2 VDDCA/2, X X VDDQ/2 VIX VIX X CK, DQS CK, DQS VSSCA, VSSQ VSSCA, VSSQ Table 69: Crosspoint Voltage for Differential Input Signals (CK, CK#, DQS, DQS#) LPDDR2-1066 to LPDDR2-200 Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit Notes VIXCA(AC) Differential input crosspoint voltage relative to VDDCA/2 for CK and CK# -120 120 mV 1, 2 VIXDQ(AC) Differential input crosspoint voltage relative to VDDQ/2 for DQS and DQ# -120 120 mV 1, 2 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. The typical value of VIX(AC) is expected to be about 0.5 x VDD of the transmitting device, and it is expected to track variations in VDD. VIX(AC) indicates the voltage at which differential input signals must cross. 2. For CK and CK#, VREF = VREFCA(DC). For DQS and DQS#, VREF = VREFDQ(DC). 126 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions Input Slew Rate Table 70: Differential Input Slew Rate Definition Measured1 Description From To Defined by Differential input slew rate for rising edge (CK/CK# and DQS/DQS#) VIL,diff,max VIH,diff,min [VIH,diff,min - VIL,diff,max@TRdiff Differential input slew rate for falling edge (CK/CK# and DQS/DQS#) VIH,diff,min VIL,diff,max [VIH,diff,min - VIL,diff,max@TFdiff 1. The differential signals (CK/CK# and DQS/DQS#) must be linear between these thresholds. Note: Figure 88: Differential Input Slew Rate Definition for CK, CK#, DQS, and DQS# TRdiff Differential Input Voltage TFdiff VIH,diff,min 0 VIL,diff,max Time Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions Table 71: Single-Ended AC and DC Output Levels Symbol Parameter Value Unit Notes VOH(AC) AC output HIGH measurement level (for output slew rate) VREF + 0.12 V VOL(AC) AC output LOW measurement level (for output slew rate) VREF - 0.12 V VOH(DC) DC output HIGH measurement level (for I-V curve linearity) 0.9 x VDDQ V 1 VOL(DC) DC output LOW measurement level (for I-V curve linearity) 2 IOZ MMpupd 0.1 x VDDQ V Output leakage current (DQ, DM, DQS, DQS#); DQ, DQS, DQS# are disabled; 0V VOUT VDDQ MIN -5 A MAX +5 A Delta output impedance between pull-up and pulldown for DQ/DM MIN -15 % MAX +15 % Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. IOH = -0.1mA. 2. IOL = 0.1mA. 127 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions Table 72: Differential AC and DC Output Levels Value Unit VOHdiff(AC) Symbol AC differential output HIGH measurement level (for output SR) Parameter + 0.2 x VDDQ V VOLdiff(AC) AC differential output LOW measurement level (for output SR) - 0.2 x VDDQ V Single-Ended Output Slew Rate With the reference load for timing measurements, the output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between V OL(AC) and V OH(AC) for single-ended signals. Table 73: Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition Measured Description From To Defined by Single-ended output slew rate for rising edge VOL(AC) VOH(AC) [VOH(AC) - VOL(AC)@TRSE Single-ended output slew rate for falling edge VOH(AC) VOL(AC) [VOH(AC) - VOL(AC)@TFSE 1. Output slew rate is verified by design and characterization and may not be subject to production testing. Note: Figure 89: Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Definition TRSE Single-Ended Output Voltage (DQ) TFSE VOH(AC) VREF VOL(AC) Time Table 74: Single-Ended Output Slew Rate Notes 1-5 apply to all parameters conditions Value Parameter Symbol Min Max Unit Single-ended output slew rate (output impedance = 40 r SRQSE 1.5 3.5 V/ns Single-ended output slew rate (output impedance = 60 r SRQSE 1.0 2.5 V/ns 0.7 1.4 - Output slew-rate-matching ratio (pull-up to pull-down) Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Definitions: SR = slew rate; Q = output (similar to DQ = data-in, data-out); SE = singleended signals. 128 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions 2. Measured with output reference load. 3. The ratio of pull-up to pull-down slew rate is specified for the same temperature and voltage over the entire temperature and voltage range. For a given output, the ratio represents the maximum difference between pull-up and pull-down drivers due to process variation. 4. The output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between VOL(AC) and VOH(AC). 5. Slew rates are measured under typical simultaneous switching output (SSO) conditions, with one-half of DQ signals per data byte driving HIGH and one-half of DQ signals per data byte driving LOW. Differential Output Slew Rate With the reference load for timing measurements, the output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between V OL,diff(AC) and V OH,diff(AC) for differential signals. Table 75: Differential Output Slew Rate Definition Measured Description From To Defined by Differential output slew rate for rising edge VOL,diff(AC) VOH,diff(AC) [VOH,diff(AC) - VOL,diff(AC)@TRdiff Differential output slew rate for falling edge VOH,diff(AC) VOL,diff(AC) [VOH,diff(AC) - VOL,diff(AC)@TFdiff 1. Output slew rate is verified by design and characterization and may not be subject to production testing. Note: Differential Output Voltage (DQS, DQS#) Figure 90: Differential Output Slew Rate Definition TFdiff TRdiff VOH,diff(AC) 0 VOL,diff(AC) Time Table 76: Differential Output Slew Rate Value Parameter Differential output slew rate (output impedance = 40 r PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 129 Symbol Min Max Unit SRQdiff 3.0 7.0 V/ns Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Characteristics and Operating Conditions Table 76: Differential Output Slew Rate (Continued) Value Parameter Differential output slew rate (output impedance = 60 r Notes: Symbol Min Max Unit SRQdiff 2.0 5.0 V/ns 1. Definitions: SR = slew rate; Q = output (similar to DQ = data-in, data-out); SE = singleended signals. 2. Measured with output reference load. 3. The output slew rate for falling and rising edges is defined and measured between VOL(AC) and VOH(AC). 4. Slew rates are measured under typical simultaneous switching output (SSO) conditions, with one-half of DQ signals per data byte driving HIGH and one-half of DQ signals per data byte driving LOW. Table 77: AC Overshoot/Undershoot Specification Applies for CA[9:0], CS#, CKE, CK, CK#, DQ, DQS, DQS#, DM Parameter 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 Unit Maximum peak amplitude provided for overshoot area 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 V 0.35 Maximum peak amplitude provided for undershoot area 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 V Maximum area above VDD1 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.24 0.30 0.40 0.48 V/ns Maximum area below VSS2 0.15 0.17 0.20 0.24 0.30 0.40 0.48 V/ns Notes: 1. VDD stands for VDDCA for CA[9:0], CK, CK#, CS#, and CKE. VDD stands for VDDQ for DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#. 2. VSS stands for VSSCA for CA[9:0], CK, CK#, CS#, and CKE. VSS stands for VSSQ for DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#. Figure 91: Overshoot and Undershoot Definition Maximum amplitude Volts (V) Overshoot area VDD Time (ns) VSS Undershoot area Maximum amplitude Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. VDD stands for VDDCA for CA[9:0], CK, CK#, CS#, and CKE. VDD stands for VDDQ for DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#. 2. VSS stands for VSSCA for CA[9:0], CK, CK#, CS#, and CKE. VSS stands for VSSQ for DQ, DM, DQS, and DQS#. 130 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance HSUL_12 Driver Output Timing Reference Load The timing reference loads are not intended as a precise representation of any particular system environment or a depiction of the actual load presented by a production tester. System designers should use IBIS or other simulation tools to correlate the timing reference load to a system environment. Manufacturers correlate to their production test conditions, generally with one or more coaxial transmission lines terminated at the tester electronics. Figure 92: HSUL_12 Driver Output Reference Load for Timing and Slew Rate LPDDR2 VREF 0.5 x VDDQ 50 VTT = 0.5 x VDDQ Output C LOAD = 5pF Note: 1. All output timing parameter values (tDQSCK, tDQSQ, tQHS, tHZ, tRPRE etc.) are reported with respect to this reference load. This reference load is also used to report slew rate. Output Driver Impedance Output driver impedance is selected by a mode register during initialization. To achieve tighter tolerances, ZQ calibration is required. Output specifications refer to the default output drive unless specifically stated otherwise. The output driver impedance R ON is defined by the value of the external reference resistor RZQ as follows: RONPU = VDDQ - VOUT ABS(IOUT) When RONPD is turned off. RONPD = VOUT ABS(IOUT) When RONPU is turned off. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 131 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance Figure 93: Output Driver Chip in Drive Mode Output Driver VDDQ IPU To other circuitry (RCV, etc.) RONPU DQ IOUT RONPD VOUT IPD VSSQ Output Driver Impedance Characteristics with ZQ Calibration Output driver impedance is defined by the value of the external reference resistor RZQ. Typical RZQ is 240 ohms. Table 78: Output Driver DC Electrical Characteristics with ZQ Calibration Notes 1-4 apply to all parameters and conditions RONnom Resistor Mismatch between pull-up and pull-down Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN VOUT Min Typ Max Unit RON34PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/7 RON34PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/7 RON40PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/6 RON40PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/6 RON48PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/5 RON48PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/5 RON60PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/4 RON60PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/4 RON80PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/3 RON80PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/3 RON120PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/2 RON120PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.85 1.00 1.15 RZQ/2 +15.00 % -15.00 MMPUPD Notes 5 1. Applies across entire operating temperature range after calibration. 2. RZQ 3. The tolerance limits are specified after calibration, with fixed voltage and temperature. For behavior of the tolerance limits if temperature or voltage changes after calibration. 4. Pull-down and pull-up output driver impedances should be calibrated at 0.5 x VDDQ. 5. Measurement definition for mismatch between pull-up and pull-down, MMPUPD: Measure RONPU and RONPD, both at 0.5 x VDDQ: 132 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance MMPUPD = RONPU - RONPD x 100 RON,nom For example, with MMPUPD (MAX) = 15% and RONPD = 0.85, RONPU must be less than 1.0. Output Driver Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity If temperature and/or voltage change after calibration, the tolerance limits widen. Table 79: Output Driver Sensitivity Definition Resistor VOUT Min Max Unit RONPD 0.5 x VDDQ 85 - (dRONdT _T|) - (dRONdV _V|) 115 - (dRONdT _T|) - (dRONdV _V|) % RONPU Notes: 1. T = T - T (at calibration). V = V - V (at calibration). 2. dRONdT and dRONdV are not subject to production testing; they are verified by design and characterization. Table 80: Output Driver Temperature and Voltage Sensitivity Symbol Parameter Min Max Unit RONPD RON temperature sensitivity 0.00 0.75 %/C RONPU RON voltage sensitivity 0.00 0.20 %/mV Output Impedance Characteristics Without ZQ Calibration Output driver impedance is defined by design and characterization as the default setting. Table 81: Output Driver DC Electrical Characteristics Without ZQ Calibration RONnom Resistor VOUT Min Typ Max Unit RON34PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/7 RON34PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/7 RON40PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/6 RON40PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/6 RON48PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/5 RON48PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/5 RON60PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/4 RON60PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/4 RON80PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/3 RON80PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/3 RON120PD 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/2 RON120PU 0.5 x VDDQ 0.70 1.00 1.30 RZQ/2 Notes: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1. Applies across entire operating temperature range without calibration. 2. RZQ 133 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance Table 82: I-V Curves RON (RZQ) Pull-Down Pull-Up Current (mA) / RON (ohms) Current (mA) / RON (ohms) Default Value after ZQRESET With Calibration Default Value after ZQRESET With Calibration Voltage (V) Min (mA) Max (mA) Min (mA) Max (mA) Min (mA) Max (mA) Min (mA) Max (mA) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.05 0.19 0.32 0.21 0.26 -0.19 -0.32 -0.21 -0.26 0.10 0.38 0.64 0.40 0.53 -0.38 -0.64 -0.40 -0.53 0.15 0.56 0.94 0.60 0.78 -0.56 -0.94 -0.60 -0.78 0.20 0.74 1.26 0.79 1.04 -0.74 -1.26 -0.79 -1.04 0.25 0.92 1.57 0.98 1.29 -0.92 -1.57 -0.98 -1.29 0.30 1.08 1.86 1.17 1.53 -1.08 -1.86 -1.17 -1.53 0.35 1.25 2.17 1.35 1.79 -1.25 -2.17 -1.35 -1.79 0.40 1.40 2.46 1.52 2.03 -1.40 -2.46 -1.52 -2.03 0.45 1.54 2.74 1.69 2.26 -1.54 -2.74 -1.69 -2.26 0.50 1.68 3.02 1.86 2.49 -1.68 -3.02 -1.86 -2.49 0.55 1.81 3.30 2.02 2.72 -1.81 -3.30 -2.02 -2.72 0.60 1.92 3.57 2.17 2.94 -1.92 -3.57 -2.17 -2.94 0.65 2.02 3.83 2.32 3.15 -2.02 -3.83 -2.32 -3.15 0.70 2.11 4.08 2.46 3.36 -2.11 -4.08 -2.46 -3.36 0.75 2.19 4.31 2.58 3.55 -2.19 -4.31 -2.58 -3.55 0.80 2.25 4.54 2.70 3.74 -2.25 -4.54 -2.70 -3.74 0.85 2.30 4.74 2.81 3.91 -2.30 -4.74 -2.81 -3.91 0.90 2.34 4.92 2.89 4.05 -2.34 -4.92 -2.89 -4.05 0.95 2.37 5.08 2.97 4.23 -2.37 -5.08 -2.97 -4.23 1.00 2.41 5.20 3.04 4.33 -2.41 -5.20 -3.04 -4.33 1.05 2.43 5.31 3.09 4.44 -2.43 -5.31 -3.09 -4.44 1.10 2.46 5.41 3.14 4.52 -2.46 -5.41 -3.14 -4.52 1.15 2.48 5.48 3.19 4.59 -2.48 -5.48 -3.19 -4.59 1.20 2.50 5.55 3.23 4.65 -2.50 -5.55 -3.23 -4.65 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 134 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance Figure 94: Output Impedance = 240 Ohms, I-V Curves After ZQRESET 6 PD (MAX) PD (MIN) PU MAX) 4 PU (MIN) mA 2 0 -2 -4 -6 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 Voltage PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 135 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Output Driver Impedance Figure 95: Output Impedance = 240 Ohms, I-V Curves After Calibration 6 PD (MAX) PD (MIN) PU MAX) 4 PU (MIN) mA 2 0 -2 -4 -6 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 Voltage PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 136 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Clock Specification Clock Specification The specified clock jitter is a random jitter with Gaussian distribution. Input clocks violating minimum or maximum values may result in device malfunction. Table 83: Definitions and Calculations Symbol tCK(avg) Description and nCK Calculation The average clock period across any consecutive 200-cycle window. Each clock period is calculated tCK(avg) = from rising clock edge to rising clock edge. Unit tCK(avg) represents the actual clock average tCK(avg)of the input clock under operation. Unit nCK represents one clock cycle of the input clock, counting from actual clock edge to actual clock edge. Notes N tCKj /N j=1 Where N = 200 tCK(avg)can change no more than 1% within a 100-clock-cycle window, provided that all jitter and timing specifications are met. tCK(abs) The absolute clock period, as measured from one rising clock edge to the next consecutive rising clock edge. tCH(avg) The average HIGH pulse width, as calculated across any 200 consecutive HIGH pulses. 1 N tCH(avg) = tCHj /(N x tCK(avg)) j=1 Where N = 200 tCL(avg) The average LOW pulse width, as calculated across any 200 consecutive LOW pulses. N tCL(avg) = tCL j /(N x tCK(avg)) j=1 Where N = 200 tJIT(per) The single-period jitter defined as the largest detJIT(per) = min/max of tCK - tCK(avg) i viation of any signal tCK from tCK(avg). 1 Where i = 1 to 200 tJIT(per),act The actual clock jitter for a given system. tJIT(per), The specified clock period jitter allowance. allowed tJIT(cc) The absolute difference in clock periods between t tJIT(cc) = max of tCK i + 1 - CKi two consecutive clock cycles. tJIT(cc) defines the cycle-to-cycle jitter. 1 tERR(nper) The cumulative error across n multiple consecutive cycles from tCK(avg). 1 i+n-1 tERR(nper) = tCK - (n x tCK(avg)) j j=i tERR(nper),act The actual cumulative error over n cycles for a given system. tERR(nper), allowed The specified cumulative error allowance over n cycles. tERR(nper),min The minimum tERR(nper). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tERR(nper),min = (1 + 0.68LN(n)) x tJIT(per),min 137 2 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Clock Period Jitter Table 83: Definitions and Calculations (Continued) Symbol Description Calculation tERR(nper),max The maximum tERR(nper). tERR(nper),max = (1 + 0.68LN(n)) x tJIT(per),max tJIT(duty) Defined with absolute and average specifications tJIT(duty),min = for tCH and tCL, respectively. MIN((tCH(abs),min - tCH(avg),min), Notes 2 (tCL(abs),min - tCL(avg),min)) x tCK(avg) tJIT(duty),max = MAX((tCH(abs),max - tCH(avg),max), (tCL(abs),max - tCL(avg),max)) x tCK(avg) Notes: tCK(abs), tCH(abs), 1. Not subject to production testing. 2. Using these equations, tERR(nper) tables can be generated for each tJIT(per),act value. and tCL(abs) These parameters are specified with their average values; however, the relationship between the average timing and the absolute instantaneous timing (defined in the following table) is applicable at all times. Table 84: tCK(abs), tCH(abs), and tCL(abs) Definitions Parameter Symbol Absolute clock period tCK(abs) tCK(avg),min + Absolute clock HIGH pulse width tCH(abs) tCH(avg),min + tJIT(duty),min2/tCK(avg)min tCK(avg) Absolute clock LOW pulse width tCL(abs) tCL(avg),min + tJIT(duty),min2/tCK(avg)min tCK(avg) Notes: Minimum tJIT(per),min Unit ps1 1. tCK(avg),min is expressed in ps for this table. 2. tJIT(duty),min is a negative value. Clock Period Jitter LPDDR2 devices can tolerate some clock period jitter without core timing parameter derating. This section describes device timing requirements with clock period jitter (tJIT(per)) in excess of the values found in the AC Timing section. Calculating cycle time derating and clock cycle derating are also described. Clock Period Jitter Effects on Core Timing Parameters Core timing parameters (tRCD, tRP, tRTP, tWR, tWRA, tWTR, tRC, tRAS, tRRD, tFAW) extend across multiple clock cycles. Clock period jitter impacts these parameters when measured in numbers of clock cycles. Within the specification limits, the device is characterized and verified to support tnPARAM = RU[tPARAM/tCK(avg)]. During device operation where clock jitter is outside specification limits, the number of clocks or tCK(avg), may need to be increased based on the values for each core timing parameter. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 138 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Clock Period Jitter Cycle Time Derating for Core Timing Parameters For a given number of clocks (tnPARAM), when tCK(avg) and tERR(tnPARAM),act exceed cycle time derating may be required for core timing parameters. tERR(tnPARAM),allowed, t t t t t CycleTimeDerating = max PARAM + ERR( nPARAM),act - ERR( nPARAM),allowed - tCK(avg) , 0 tnPARAM Cycle time derating analysis should be conducted for each core timing parameter. The amount of cycle time derating required is the maximum of the cycle time deratings determined for each individual core timing parameter. Clock Cycle Derating for Core Timing Parameters For each core timing parameter and a given number of clocks (tnPARAM), clock cycle derating should be specified with tJIT(per). For a given number of clocks (tnPARAM), when tCK(avg) plus (tERR(tnPARAM),act) exceed the supported cumulative tERR(tnPARAM),allowed, derating is required. If the equation below results in a positive value for a core timing parameter (tCORE), the required clock cycle derating will be that positive value (in clocks). t t t t t ClockCycleDerating = RU PARAM + ERR( nPARAM),act - ERR( nPARAM),allowed - tnPARAM tCK(avg) Cycle-time derating analysis should be conducted for each core timing parameter. Clock Jitter Effects on Command/Address Timing Parameters Command/address timing parameters (tIS, tIH, tISCKE, tIHCKE, tISb, tIHb, tISCKEb, tIHCKEb) are measured from a command/address signal (CKE, CS, or CA[9:0]) transition edge to its respective clock signal (CK/CK#) crossing. The specification values are not affected by the tJIT(per) applied, because the setup and hold times are relative to the clock signal crossing that latches the command/address. Regardless of clock jitter values, these values must be met. Clock Jitter Effects on READ Timing Parameters tRPRE When the device is operated with input clock jitter, tRPRE must be derated by the tJIT(per),act,max of the input clock that exceeds tJIT(per),allowed,max. Output deratings are relative to the input clock: tRPRE(min,derated) = 0.9 - tJIT(per),act,max - tJIT(per),allowed,max tCK(avg) For example, if the measured jitter into a LPDDR2-800 device has tCK(avg) = 2500ps, = -172ps, and tJIT(per),act,max = +193ps, then tRPRE,min,derated = t 0.9 - ( JIT(per),act,max - tJIT(per),allowed,max)/tCK(avg) = 0.9 - (193 - 100)/2500 = 0.8628 tCK(avg). tJIT(per),act,min PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 139 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Clock Period Jitter tLZ(DQ), tHZ(DQ), tDQSCK, tLZ(DQS), tHZ(DQS) These parameters are measured from a specific clock edge to a data signal transition (DMn or DQm, where: n = 0, 1, 2, or 3; and m = DQ[31:0]), and specified timings must be met with respect to that clock edge. Therefore, they are not affected by tJIT(per). tQSH, tQSL These parameters are affected by duty cycle jitter, represented by tCH(abs)min and parameters determine the absolute data valid window at the device pin. The absolute minimum data valid window at the device pin = min [( tQSH(abs)min x tCK(avg)min - tDQSQmax - tQHSmax), (tQSL(abs)min x tCK(avg)min - tDQSQmax tQHSmax)]. This minimum data valid window must be met at the target frequency regardless of clock jitter. tCL(abs)min. These tRPST tRPST is affected by duty cycle jitter, represented by tCL(abs). Therefore, tRPST(abs)min can be specified by tCL(abs)min. tRPST(abs)min = tCL(abs)min - 0.05 = tQSL(abs)min. Clock Jitter Effects on WRITE Timing Parameters tDS, tDH These parameters are measured from a data signal (DMn or DQm, where n = 0, 1, 2, 3; and m = DQ[31:0]) transition edge to its respective data strobe signal (DQSn, DQSn#: n = 0,1,2,3) crossing. The specification values are not affected by the amount of tJIT(per) applied, because the setup and hold times are relative to the clock signal crossing that latches the command/address. Regardless of clock jitter values, these values must be met. tDSS, tDSH These parameters are measured from a data strobe signal crossing (DQSx, DQSx#) to its clock signal crossing (CK/CK#). The specification values are not affected by the amount of tJIT(per)) applied, because the setup and hold times are relative to the clock signal crossing that latches the command/address. Regardless of clock jitter values, these values must be met. tDQSS tDQSS is measured from the clock signal crossing (CK/CK#) to the first latching data strobe signal crossing (DQSx, DQSx#). When the device is operated with input clock jitter, this parameter must be derated by the actual tJIT(per),act of the input clock in excess of tJIT(per),allowed. tDQSS(min,derated) = 0.75 - tJIT(per),act,min - tJIT(per),allowed, min tCK(avg) tDQSS(max,derated) = 1.25 - tJIT(per),act,max - tJIT(per),allowed, max tCK(avg) For example, if the measured jitter into an LPDDR2-800 device has tCK(avg) = 2500ps, tJIT(per),act,min = -172ps, and tJIT(per),act,max = +193ps, then: tDQSS,(min,derated) = 0.75 - (tJIT(per),act,min - tJIT(per),allowed,min)/tCK(avg) = 0.75 - (-172 + 100)/2500 = 0.7788 tCK(avg), and PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 140 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Refresh Requirements tDQSS,(max,derated) = 1.25 - (tJIT(per),act,max - tJIT(per),allowed,max)/tCK(avg) = 1.25 - (193 - 100)/2500 = 1.2128 tCK(avg). Refresh Requirements Table 85: Refresh Requirement Parameters (Per Density) Parameter Symbol Number of banks 64Mb 128Mb 256Mb 512Mb 1Gb 2Gb 4Gb 8Gb Unit 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 Refresh window: TCASE 85 tREFW 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 ms Refresh window: 85C < TCASE 105C tREFW 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ms Required number of REFRESH commands (MIN) R 2048 2048 4096 4096 4096 8192 8192 8192 Average time beREFab tween REFRESH com- REFpb mands (for reference only) TCASE 85C tREFI 15.6 15.6 7.8 7.8 7.8 3.9 3.9 3.9 s 0.975 0.4875 0.4875 0.4875 s 130 130 130 210 ns 60 60 60 90 ns 4.16 4.16 4.16 6.72 s tREFIpb Refresh cycle time tRFCab Per-bank REFRESH cycle time tRFCpb Burst REFRESH window = 4 x 8 x tRFCab tREFBW PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN (REFpb not supported below 1Gb) 90 90 90 90 na 2.88 2.88 2.88 141 2.88 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter Symbol Maximum frequency Min/M tCK ax Min Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 Unit Notes - - 533 466 400 333 266 200 166 MHz MIN - 1.875 2.15 2.5 3 3.75 5 6 ns MAX - 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 MIN - 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 tCK(a MAX - 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 vg) MIN - 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 tCK(a MAX - 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 vg) MIN - tCK(a Clock Timing Average clock period tCK(avg) Average HIGH pulse width tCH(avg) Average LOW pulse width tCL(avg) Absolute clock period tCK(abs) Absolute clock HIGH pulse width tCH(abs) Absolute clock LOW pulse width tCL(abs) Clock period jitter (with supported jitter) Maximum clock jitter between two consectuive clock cycles (with supported jitter) Duty cycle jitter (with supported jitter) tCK(avg)min tJIT(per)min ps MIN - 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 MAX - 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 vg) MIN - 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 tCK(a MAX - 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 0.57 vg) tJIT(per), MIN - -90 -95 -100 -110 -120 -140 -150 ps allowed MAX - 90 95 100 110 120 140 150 tJIT(cc), MAX - 180 190 200 220 240 280 300 MIN - ps allowed tJIT(duty), MIN ((tCH(abs),min - tCH(avg),min), - tCL(avg),min)) x tCK(avg) ps (tCL(abs),min allowed MAX MAX ((tCH(abs),max - tCH(avg),max), - tCL(avg),max)) x tCK(avg) - (tCL(abs),max Cumulative errors across 2 cycles tERR(2per), MIN - -132 -140 -147 -162 -177 -206 -221 allowed MAX - 132 140 147 162 177 206 221 Cumulative errors across 3 cycles tERR(3per), MIN - -157 -166 -175 -192 -210 -245 -262 allowed MAX - 157 166 175 192 210 245 262 Cumulative errors across 4 cycles tERR(4per), MIN - -175 -185 -194 -214 -233 -272 -291 allowed MAX - 175 185 194 214 233 272 291 Cumulative errors across 5 cycles tERR(5per), MIN - -188 -199 -209 -230 -251 -293 -314 allowed MAX - 188 199 209 230 251 293 314 Cumulative errors across 6 cycles tERR(6per), MIN - -200 -211 -222 -244 -266 -311 -333 allowed MAX - 200 211 222 244 266 311 333 Cumulative errors across 7 cycles tERR(7per), MIN - -209 -221 -232 -256 -279 -325 -348 allowed MAX - 209 221 232 256 279 325 348 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 142 ps ps ps ps ps ps Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing (Continued) Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 Cumulative errors across 8 cycles tERR(8per), MIN - -217 -229 -241 -266 -290 -338 -362 allowed MAX - 217 229 241 266 290 338 362 Cumulative errors across 9 cycles tERR(9per), MIN - -224 -237 -249 -274 -299 -349 -374 allowed MAX - 224 237 249 274 299 349 374 Cumulative errors across 10 cycles tERR(10per), MIN - -231 -244 -257 -282 -308 -359 -385 allowed MAX - 231 244 257 282 308 359 385 Cumulative errors across 11 cycles tERR(11per), MIN - -237 -250 -263 -289 -316 -368 -395 allowed MAX - 237 250 263 289 316 368 395 Cumulative errors across 12 cycles tERR(12per), MIN - -242 -256 -269 -296 -323 -377 -403 allowed MAX - 242 256 269 296 323 377 403 Cumulative errors across n = 13, 14, 15..., 49, 50 cycles Symbol Min/M tCK ax Min tERR(nper), tERR(nper),allowed,min MIN = (1 + 0.68ln(n)) x Unit Notes ps ps ps ps ps ps tJIT(per),allowed,min allowed tERR(nper), MAX allowed,max = (1 + 0.68ln(n)) x tJIT(per),allowed,max ZQ Calibration Parameters tZQINIT MIN - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 s Long calibration time tZQCL MIN 6 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 ns Short calibration time tZQCS MIN 6 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 ns Calibration RESET time tZQRESET MIN 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 ns tDQSCK MIN - 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 MAX - 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 5500 DQSCK delta short tDQSCKDS MAX - 330 380 450 540 1080 ps 4 DQSCK delta medium tDQSCKDM MAX - 680 780 900 1050 1350 1800 1900 ps 5 DQSCK delta long tDQSCKDL MAX - 920 1050 1200 1400 1800 2400 ps 6 Initialization calibration time READ Parameters3 DQS output access time from CK/CK# 670 900 - ps tDQSQ MAX - 200 220 240 280 340 400 500 ps Data-hold skew factor tQHS MAX - 230 260 280 340 400 480 600 ps DQS output HIGH pulse width tQSH MIN - tCH(abs) DQS output LOW pulse width tQSL - tCL(abs) Data half period tQHP MIN - tQH MIN - DQS-DQ skew - 0.05 tCK(a - 0.05 tCK(a vg) MIN vg) MIN (tQSH, tQSL) tCK(a vg) DQ/DQS output hold time from DQS PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tQHP 143 - tQHS ps Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing (Continued) Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter READ preamble Symbol tRPRE Min/M tCK ax Min MIN Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 Unit Notes 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 tCK(a - 7 vg) READ postamble tRPST MIN tCL(abs) - tCK(a - 0.05 8 vg) DQS Low-Z from clock DQ Low-Z from clock DQS High-Z from clock tLZ(DQS) MIN tDQSCK - tLZ(DQ) MIN - tHZ(DQS) MAX - tDQSCK(MIN) - (1.4 x tDQSCK ps tQHS(MAX)) ps (MAX) - 100 ps tHZ(DQ) MAX - DQ and DM input hold time (VREF based) tDH MIN - 210 235 270 350 430 480 600 ps DQ and DM input setup time (VREF based) tDS MIN - 210 235 270 350 430 480 600 ps DQ and DM input pulse width tDIPW MIN - 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 tCK(a Write command to first DQS latching transition tDQSS 0.75 tCK(a DQ High-Z from clock WRITE tDQSCK(MAX) (MIN) - 300 + (1.4 x tDQSQ(MAX)) ps Parameters3 vg) MIN - 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 vg) MAX - 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 tCK(a MIN - 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 tCK(a 0.4 tCK(a 0.2 tCK(a vg) DQS input high-level width tDQSH DQS input low-level width tDQSL vg) MIN - 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 vg) DQS falling edge to CK setup time tDSS DQS falling edge hold time from CK tDSH MIN - 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 tCK(a Write postamble tWPST MIN - 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 tCK(a Write preamble tWPRE 0.35 tCK(a MIN - 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 vg) vg) vg) MIN - 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 vg) CKE Input Parameters CKE minimum pulse width (HIGH and LOW pulse width) CKE input setup time tCKE MIN 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tCK(a tISCKE MIN - 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 tCK(a vg) 9 vg) CKE input hold time tIHCKE MIN - 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 tCK(a 10 vg) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 144 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing (Continued) Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter Symbol Min/M tCK ax Min Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 Unit Notes Command Address Input Parameters3 Address and control input setup time tIS MIN - 220 250 290 370 460 600 740 ps 11 Address and control input hold time tIH MIN - 220 250 290 370 460 600 740 ps 11 tIPW MIN - 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.40 tCK(a Address and control input pulse width vg) Boot Parameters (10 MHz-55 MHz)12, 13, 14 Clock cycle time tCKb MAX - 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ns MIN - 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 CKE input setup time tISCKEb MIN - 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 ns CKE input hold time tIHCKEb MIN - 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 ns Address and control input setup time tISb MIN - 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 ps Address and control input hold time tIHb MIN - 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 ps DQS output data access time from CK/CK# tDQSCKb MIN - 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 MAX - 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 tDQSQb MAX - 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 ns tQHSb MAX - 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 ns MODE REGISTER WRITE command period tMRW MIN 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tCK(a MODE REGISTER READ command period tMRR 2 tCK(a Data strobe edge to output data edge Data hold skew factor ns Mode Register Parameters Core vg) MIN 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 vg) Parameters15 READ latency RL MIN 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 3 tCK(a WRITE latency WL MIN 1 4 4 3 2 2 1 1 tCK(a ACTIVATE-to-ACTIVATE command period tRC - tRAS tRPab vg) vg) MIN tRAS CKE minimum pulse width during SELF REFRESH (low pulse width during SELF REFRESH) tCKESR MIN 3 SELF REFRESH exit to next valid command delay tXSR MIN 2 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 15 + (with all-bank precharge), + tRPpb (with per-bank precharge) 15 15 15 tRFCab 145 + 10 15 15 15 ns 17 ns ns Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing (Continued) Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 533 400 333 tXP MIN 2 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ns LPDDR2-S4 CAS-to-CAS delay tCCD MIN 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 tCK(a LPDDR2-S2 CAS-to-CAS delay tCCD 1 tCK(a Internal READ to PRECHARGE command delay tRTP MIN 2 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 ns RAS-to-CAS delay tRCD Fast 3 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ns TYP 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Row precharge time (single bank) tRPpb Fast 3 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 TYP 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 tRPpab Fast 3 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 4-bank TYP 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 tRPpab Fast 3 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Exit power-down to next valid command delay Symbol Min/M tCK ax Min Unit Notes vg) MIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 vg) Row precharge time (all banks) Row precharge time (all banks) ns ns ns 8-bank TYP 3 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 Row active time tRAS MIN 3 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 ns MAX - 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 s WRITE recovery time tWR MIN 3 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 ns tWTR MIN 2 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 ns Active bank a to active bank b tRRD MIN 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ns Four-bank activate window tFAW MIN 8 50 50 50 50 50 50 60 ns Minimum deep power-down time tDPD MIN - 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 s tDQSCK (derated) MAX - 5620 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 ps Internal WRITE-to-READ command delay Temperature Derating16 tDQSCK derating PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 146 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing Table 86: AC Timing (Continued) Notes 1-2 apply to all parameters and conditions. AC timing parameters must satisfy the tCK minimum conditions (in multiples of tCK) as well as the timing specifications when values for both are indicated. Parameter Symbol Core timing temperature derating tRCD Min/M tCK ax Min Data Rate 1066 933 800 667 MIN - tRCD MIN - tRC MIN - tRAS MIN - tRP MIN - tRRD 533 + 1.875 400 333 Unit Notes ns (derated) tRC + 1.875 ns (derated) tRAS + 1.875 ns (derated) tRP + 1.875 ns (derated) tRRD (derated) Notes: + 1.875 ns 1. Frequency values are for reference only. Clock cycle time (tCK) is used to determine device capabilities. 2. All AC timings assume an input slew rate of 1 V/ns. 3. READ, WRITE, and input setup and hold values are referenced to VREF. 4. tDQSCKDS is the absolute value of the difference between any two tDQSCK measurements (in a byte lane) within a contiguous sequence of bursts in a 160ns rolling window. tDQSCKDS is not tested and is guaranteed by design. Temperature drift in the system is <10C/s. Values do not include clock jitter. t 5. DQSCKDM is the absolute value of the difference between any two tDQSCK measurements (in a byte lane) within a 1.6s rolling window. tDQSCKDM is not tested and is guaranteed by design. Temperature drift in the system is <10C/s. Values do not include clock jitter. 6. tDQSCKDL is the absolute value of the difference between any two tDQSCK measurements (in a byte lane) within a 32ms rolling window. tDQSCKDL is not tested and is guaranteed by design. Temperature drift in the system is <10C/s. Values do not include clock jitter. For LOW-to-HIGH and HIGH-to-LOW transitions, the timing reference is at the point when the signal crosses the transition threshold (VTT). tHZ and tLZ transitions occur in the same access time (with respect to clock) as valid data transitions. These parameters are not referenced to a specific voltage level but to the time when the device output is no longer driving (for tRPST, tHZ(DQS) and tHZ(DQ)), or begins driving (for tRPRE, tLZ(DQS), tLZ(DQ)). The figure below shows a method to calculate the point when the device is no longer driving tHZ(DQS) and tHZ(DQ) or begins driving tLZ(DQS) and tLZ(DQ) by measuring the signal at two different voltages. The actual voltage measurement points are not critical as long as the calculation is consistent. The parameters tLZ(DQS), tLZ(DQ), tHZ(DQS), and tHZ(DQ) are defined as single-ended. The timing parameters tRPRE and tRPST are determined from the differential signal DQS/DQS#. Output Transition Timing PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 147 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 AC Timing VOH VTT + Y mV VOH - X mV VOH - 2x X mV tLZ(DQS), tLZ(DQ) actual wave rm fo VTT X 2x X VTT + 2x Y mV tHZ(DQS), tHZ(DQ) VTT Y 2x Y VTT - Y mV VOL + 2x X mV VTT - 2x Y mV VOL + X mV T1 T2 Start driving point = 2 x T1 - T2 VOL T1 T2 End driving point = 2 x T1 - T2 7. Measured from the point when DQS/DQS# begins driving the signal, to the point when DQS/DQS# begins driving the first rising strobe edge. 8. Measured from the last falling strobe edge of DQS/DQS# to the point when DQS/DQS# finishes driving the signal. 9. CKE input setup time is measured from CKE reaching a HIGH/LOW voltage level to CK/CK# crossing. 10. CKE input hold time is measured from CK/CK# crossing to CKE reaching a HIGH/LOW voltage level. 11. Input setup/hold time for signal (CA[9:0], CS#). 12. To ensure device operation before the device is configured, a number of AC boot timing parameters are defined in this table. The letter b is appended to the boot parameter symbols (for example, tCK during boot is tCKb). 13. Mobile LPDDR2 devices set some mode register default values upon receiving a RESET (MRW) command, as specified in Mode Register Definition. 14. The output skew parameters are measured with default output impedance settings using the reference load. 15. The minimum tCK column applies only when tCK is greater than 6ns. 16. Timing derating applies for operation at 85C to 105C when the requirement to derate is indicated by mode register 4 op-code (see the MR4 Device Temperature (MA[7:0] = 04h) table). 17. DRAM devices should be evenly addressed when being accessed. Disproportionate accesses to a particular row address may result in reduction of the product lifetime. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 148 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Figure 96: Command Input Setup and Hold Timing T0 T1 T2 T3 tIS tIH tIS tIH CK# CK CS# VIL(DC) VIL(AC) VIH(AC) tIS tIH CA[9:0] CMD CA rise NOP CA fall CA rise VIH(DC) tIS tIH CA fall CA rise Command CA fall NOP Transitioning data Notes: CA rise CA fall Command Don't Care 1. The setup and hold timing shown applies to all commands. 2. Setup and hold conditions also apply to the CKE pin. For timing diagrams related to the CKE pin, see Power-Down (page 94). CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating For all input signals (CA and CS#), the total required setup time (tIS) and hold time (tIH) is calculated by adding the data sheet tIS (base) and tIH (base) values to the tIS and tIH derating values, respectively. Example: tIS (total setup time) = tIS(base) + tIS. (See the series of tables following this section.) The typical setup slew rate (tIS) for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IH(AC)min. The typical setup slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IL(AC)max. If the actual signal is consistently earlier than the typical slew rate line between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-(AC) region, use the typical slew rate for the derating value (see Figure 97 (page 152)). If the actual signal is later than the typical slew rate line anywhere between the shaded V REF(DC)-to-AC region, the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the AC level to the DC level is used for the derating value (see Figure 99 (page 154)). The hold (tIH) typical slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IL(DC)max and the first crossing of V REF(DC). The hold ( tIH) typical slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IH(DC)min and the first crossing of V REF(DC). If the actual signal is consistently later than the typical slew rate line between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, use the typical slew rate for the derating value (see Figure 98 (page 153)). If the actual signal is earlier than the typical slew rate line anywhere between the shaded DC-to-VREF(DC) region, the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the DC level to V REF(DC) level is used for the derating value (see Figure 100 (page 155)). For a valid transition, the input signal must remain above or below V IH/VIL(AC) for a specified time, tVAC (see Table 91 (page 151)). PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 149 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating For slow slew rates the total setup time could be a negative value (that is, a valid input signal will not have reached V IH/VIL(AC) at the time of the rising clock transition). A valid input signal is still required to complete the transition and reach V IH/VIL(AC). For slew rates between the values listed in Table 89, the derating values are obtained using linear interpolation. Slew rate values are not typically subject to production testing. They are verified by design and characterization. Table 87: CA and CS# Setup and Hold Base Values (>400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) Data Rate Parameter 1066 933 800 667 533 466 Reference tIS (base) 0 30 70 150 240 300 VIH/VIL(AC) = VREF(DC) 220mV tIH (base) 90 120 160 240 330 390 VIH/VIL(DC) = VREF(DC) 130mV Note: 1. AC/DC referenced for 1 V/ns CA and CS# slew rate, and 2 V/ns differential CK/CK# slew rate. Table 88: CA and CS# Setup and Hold Base Values (<400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) Data Rate Parameter 400 333 255 200 Reference tIS (base) 300 440 600 850 VIH/VIL(AC) = VREF(DC) 300mV tIH (base) 400 540 700 950 VIH/VIL(DC) = VREF(DC) 200mV Note: 1. AC/DC referenced for 1 V/ns CA and CS# slew rate, and 2 V/ns differential CK/CK# slew rate. Table 89: Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tIS/tIH (AC220) tIS, tIH derating in ps CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate 4.0 V/ns tIS CA, CS# slew rate V/ns 3.0 V/ns tIH tIS 2.0 V/ns tIH tIS 1.8 V/ns tIH tIS tIH 1.6 V/ns tIS tIH 2.0 110 65 110 65 110 65 1.5 74 43 73 43 73 43 89 59 1.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 16 32 32 -3 -5 -3 -5 13 11 29 27 -8 -13 0.9 0.8 0.7 tIH 45 43 1.2 V/ns tIS tIH 1.0 V/ns tIS tIH 8 3 24 19 40 35 56 55 -6 18 10 34 26 50 46 66 78 10 -3 26 13 42 33 58 65 4 -4 20 16 36 48 -7 2 17 34 0.5 0.4 PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tIS 2 0.6 Note: 1.4 V/ns 1. Shaded cells are not supported. 150 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Table 90: Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tIS/tIH (AC300) tIS, tIH derating in ps CK, CK# Differential Slew Rate 4.0 V/ns CA, CS# slew rate V/ns 3.0 V/ns tIS tIH tIS tIH 2.0 150 1.5 100 100 150 67 100 1.0 0 0 0.9 2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns tIS tIH 100 150 100 67 100 0 0 -4 -8 0.8 tIS tIH 67 116 83 0 0 16 -4 -8 12 -12 -20 0.7 1.6 V/ns tIS tIH 16 32 32 8 28 24 1.4 V/ns tIS tIH 44 40 tIS tIH 1.0 V/ns tIS tIH 4 -4 20 12 36 28 52 48 -3 -18 13 -2 29 14 45 34 61 66 2 -21 18 -5 34 15 50 47 -12 -32 4 -12 20 20 -35 -40 -11 -8 0.6 0.5 0.4 Note: 1.2 V/ns 1. Shaded cells are not supported. Table 91: Required Time for Valid Transition - tVAC > VIH(AC) and < VIL(AC) PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tVAC at 300mV (ps) tVAC at 220mV (ps) Slew Rate (V/ns) Min Max Min Max >2.0 75 - 175 - 2.0 57 - 170 - 1.5 50 - 167 - 1.0 38 - 163 - 0.9 34 - 162 - 0.8 29 - 161 - 0.7 22 - 159 - 0.6 13 - 155 - 0.5 0 - 150 - <0.5 0 - 150 - 151 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Figure 97: Typical Slew Rate and tVAC - tIS for CA and CS# Relative to Clock CK CK# tIS tIS tIH tIH VDDCA VIH(AC)min tVAC VREF to AC region VIH(DC)min Typical slew rate VREF(DC) Typical slew rate VIL(DC)max VREF to AC region VIL(AC)max VSSCA TF TR VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max Setup slew rate = falling signal TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 152 VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC) Setup slew rate = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Figure 98: Typical Slew Rate - tIH for CA and CS# Relative to Clock CK CK# tIS tIS tIH tIH VDDCA VIH(AC)min VIH(DC)min DC to VREF region Typical slew rate VREF(DC) Typical slew rate DC to VREF region VIL(DC)max VIL(AC)max VSSCA TR Hold slew rate VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC) falling signal = TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 153 TF Hold slew rate VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max rising signal = TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Figure 99: Tangent Line - tIS for CA and CS# Relative to Clock CK CK# tIS tIH tIS tIH VDDCA VIH(AC)min tVAC VREF to AC region Typical line VIH(DC)min Tangent line VREF(DC) Tangent line VIL(DC)max Typical line VREF to AC region VIL(AC)max TF TR VSSCA Setup slew rate tangent line [VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)]max] falling signal = TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 154 Setup slew rate tangent line [VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC)] = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 CA and CS# Setup, Hold, and Derating Figure 100: Tangent Line - tIH for CA and CS# Relative to Clock CK CK# tIS tIS tIH tIH VDDCA VIH(AC)min Typical line VIH(DC)min DC to VREF region Tangent line VREF(DC) Tangent line Typical line DC to VREF region VIL(DC)max VIL(AC)max VSSCA TR Hold slew rate tangent line [VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC)] falling signal = TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 155 TF tangent line [VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max] Hold slew rate = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating For all input signals (DQ, DM) calculate the total required setup time (tDS) and hold time (tDH) by adding the data sheet tDS(base) and tDH(base) values (see Table 92 (page 156)) to the tDS and tDH derating values, respectively (see Table 94 and Table 95 (page 157)). Example: tDS = tDS(base) + tDS. The typical tDS slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IH(AC)min. The typical tDS slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V REF(DC) and the first crossing of V IL(AC)max (see Figure 101 (page 159)). If the actual signal is consistently earlier than the typical slew rate line in Figure 97 (page 152) the area shaded gray between the V REF(DC) region and the AC region, use the typical slew rate for the derating value. If the actual signal is later than the typical slew rate line anywhere between the shaded V REF(DC) region and the AC region, the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the AC level to the DC level is used for the derating value (see Figure 99 (page 154)). The typical tDH slew rate for a rising signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IL(DC)max and the first crossing of V REF(DC). The typical tDH slew rate for a falling signal is defined as the slew rate between the last crossing of V IH(DC)min and the first crossing of V REF(DC) (see Figure 102 (page 160)). If the actual signal is consistently later than the typical slew rate line between the shaded DC-level-to-VREF(DC) region, use the typical slew rate for the derating value. If the actual signal is earlier than the typical slew rate line anywhere between shaded DCto-VREF(DC) region, the slew rate of a tangent line to the actual signal from the DC level to the V REF(DC) level is used for the derating value (see Figure 104 (page 162)). For a valid transition, the input signal must remain above or below V IH/VIL(AC) for the specified time, tVAC (see Table 96 (page 158)). The total setup time for slow slew rates could be negative (that is, a valid input signal may not have reached V IH/VIL(AC) at the time of the rising clock transition). A valid input signal is still required to complete the transition and reach V IH/VIL(AC). For slew rates between the values listed in Table 92 and Table 93, the derating values can be obtained using linear interpolation. Slew rate values are not typically subject to production testing. They are verified by design and characterization. Table 92: Data Setup and Hold Base Values (>400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) Data Rate Parameter 1066 tDS (base) -10 tDH (base) 80 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 933 800 667 533 466 Reference 15 50 130 210 230 VIH/VIL(AC) = VREF(DC) 220mV 105 140 220 300 320 VIH/VIL(DC) = VREF(DC) 130mV 1. AC/DC referenced for 1 V/ns DQ, DM slew rate, and 2 V/ns differential DQS/DQS# slew rate. 156 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Table 93: Data Setup and Hold Base Values (<400 MHz, 1 V/ns Slew Rate) Data Rate Parameter 400 333 255 200 Reference tDS (base) 180 300 450 700 VIH/VIL(AC) = VREF(DC) 300mV tDH (base) 280 400 550 800 VIH/VIL(DC) = VREF(DC) 200mV Note: 1. AC/DC referenced for 1 V/ns DQ, DM slew rate, and 2 V/ns differential DQS/DQS# slew rate. Table 94: Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tDS/tDH (AC220) tDS, tDH derating in ps DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate 4.0 V/ns tDS DQ, DM 2.0 slew 1.5 rate 1.0 V/ns 0.9 3.0 V/ns tDH tDS 110 65 74 43 0 0 2.0 V/ns tDH tDS 110 65 110 65 73 43 73 0 0 -3 -5 0.8 tDH 1.8 V/ns tDS tDH 43 89 59 0 0 16 -3 -5 13 -8 -13 0.7 1.6 V/ns tDS tDH 16 32 32 11 29 8 3 2 -6 0.6 1.4 V/ns tDS tDH 27 45 43 24 19 40 18 10 34 10 -3 0.5 tDH 35 56 55 26 50 26 13 4 -4 0.4 Note: 1.2 V/ns tDS 1.0 V/ns tDS tDH 46 66 78 42 33 58 65 20 16 36 48 -7 2 17 34 1. Shaded cells are not supported. Table 95: Derating Values for AC/DC-Based tDS/tDH (AC300) tDS, tDH derating in ps DQS, DQS# Differential Slew Rate 4.0 V/ns DQ, DM 2.0 slew 1.5 rate V/ns 1.0 3.0 V/ns 2.0 V/ns 1.8 V/ns tDS tDH tDS tDH tDS tDH 150 100 150 100 150 100 100 67 100 67 100 67 116 83 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 -4 -8 -4 -8 -12 -20 0.9 0.8 0.7 tDS tDH tDH 16 32 32 12 8 28 4 -4 20 -3 -18 13 2 0.6 0.5 0.4 Note: PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 1.6 V/ns tDS 1.4 V/ns 1.2 V/ns tDS tDH 52 48 1.0 V/ns tDS tDH tDS tDH 24 44 40 12 36 28 -2 29 14 45 34 61 66 -21 18 -5 34 15 50 47 -12 -32 4 -12 20 20 4 -35 -40 -11 -8 1. Shaded cells are not supported. 157 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Table 96: Required Time for Valid Transition - tVAC > VIH(AC) or < VIL(AC) tVAC PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN at 300mV (ps) tVAC at 220mV (ps) Slew Rate (V/ns) Min Max Min Max >2.0 75 - 175 - 2.0 57 - 170 - 1.5 50 - 167 - 1.0 38 - 163 - 0.9 34 - 162 - 0.8 29 - 161 - 0.7 22 - 159 - 0.6 13 - 155 - 0.5 0 - 150 - <0.5 0 - 150 - 158 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Figure 101: Typical Slew Rate and tVAC - tDS for DQ Relative to Strobe DQS DQS# tDS tDS tDH tDH VDDQ VIH(AC)min tVAC VREF to AC region VIH(DC)min Typical slew rate VREF(DC) Typical slew rate VIL(DC)max VREF to AC region VIL(AC)max VSSQ TF TR VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max Setup slew rate = falling signal TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 159 VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC) Setup slew rate = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Figure 102: Typical Slew Rate - tDH for DQ Relative to Strobe DQS DQS# tDS tDS tDH tDH VDDQ VIH(AC)min VIH(DC)min DC to VREF region Typical slew rate VREF(DC) Typical slew rate DC to VREF region VIL(DC)max VIL(AC)max VSSQ TR VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC) Hold slew rate falling signal = TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 160 TF VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max Hold slew rate = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Figure 103: Tangent Line - tDS for DQ with Respect to Strobe DQS DQS# tDS tDS tDH tDH VDDQ VIH(AC)min tVAC Typical line VREF to AC region VIH(DC)min Tangent line VREF(DC) Tangent line VIL(DC)max Typical line VREF to AC region VIL(AC)max TR TF VSSQ Setup slew rate tangent line [VREF(DC) - VIL(AC)max] falling signal = TF PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 161 Setup slew rate tangent line [VIH(AC)min - VREF(DC)] = rising signal TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Data Setup, Hold, and Slew Rate Derating Figure 104: Tangent Line - tDH for DQ with Respect to Strobe DQS DQS# tDS tDS tDH tDH VDDQ VIH(AC)min Nominal line VIH(DC)min DC to VREF region Tangent line VREF(DC) Tangent line Typical line DC to VREF region VIL(DC)max VIL(DC)max VSSQ TR Hold slew rate falling signal = PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN tangent line [VIH(DC)min - VREF(DC)] TF 162 TF Hold slew rate = rising signal tangent line [VREF(DC) - VIL(DC)max] TR Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Revision History Revision History Rev. N, Production - 3/12 * Changed B2 and B26 balls from V ACC to NC on the 220-Ball 2-Channel FBGA - 14mm x 14mm figure Rev. M, Production - 10/11 * Changed AT temperature range to -40C to +105C in 2Gb LPDDR2 part numbering figure * Added "Triple- and" to Figure: 168-Ball FBGA 12mm x 12mm Quad-Die Package (3DP, QDP) Rev. L, Production - 09/11 * Corrected outer ball dimensions of the LE package drawing to 11mm x 11mm * Deleted S4A configuration information Rev. K, Production - 08/11 * Updated tZQCS, from 180ns to 90ns Rev. J, Production - 05/11 * Removed the 240 ball package information to create a separate 240 ball data sheet Rev. H, Production - 3/11 * Added MT42L192M32 part number * Split previous table 2 into a single channel configuration table and a dual channel configuration table * Added package block diagram for the dual rank single channel 3 die configuration * Added 168-ball and 220-ball package drawings Rev. G, Production - 1/11 * * * * Changed status to Production Added 220-ball package and drawings (MP) Added 240-ball package and drawings (MQ) Updated IDD02, IDD3N, and IDDNS Rev. F, Advance - 11/10 * Corrected pin states for IDD4R and IDD4W Rev. E, Advance - 09/10 * Low temperature range changed from -40C to -25C Rev. D, Advance - 07/10 * Updated Table 2. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 163 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. 2Gb: x16, x32 Mobile LPDDR2 SDRAM S4 Revision History * Updated Figure 4: Dual Rank, Single Channel Package Block Diagram. * Added Figure 10: 168-Ball FBGA - 12mm x 12mm Quad-die package (QDP). * Changed IDD4R2 -25 from 200mA to 210mA and -18 from 200mA to 220mA. Rev. C, Advance - 07/10 * * * * * Added 134-ball packages. Added 168-ball (KP) package. Added 256 Meg x 32 configuration. Added Device Diagrams section. Updated tZQCS, short calibration time from 90ns to 180ns. Rev. B, Advance - 03/10 * Corrected 240-ball package codes. Rev. A, Advance - 03/10 * Initial release. 8000 S. Federal Way, P.O. Box 6, Boise, ID 83707-0006, Tel: 208-368-3900 www.micron.com/productsupport Customer Comment Line: 800-932-4992 Micron and the Micron logo are trademarks of Micron Technology, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. This data sheet contains minimum and maximum limits specified over the power supply and temperature range set forth herein. Although considered final, these specifications are subject to change, as further product development and data characterization sometimes occur. PDF: 09005aef83f3f2eb 2gb_mobile_lpddr2_s4_g69a.pdf - Rev. N 3/12 EN 164 Micron Technology, Inc. reserves the right to change products or specifications without notice. 2010 Micron Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.